JPH07320333A - Recording/reproducing apparatus and recording medium and its manufacture - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To obtain a recording medium which has an optical recording surface and a rear magnetic recording layer compasing on which labels, etc., can be printed all over by making a concealing layer the magnetic layer include a metal thin film layer. CONSTITUTION:A recording medium 1111 is composed of a substrate 1108, a light reflective film 1107, a protective layer 1106 and a magnetic recording layer 1112 which are built up in this order from the bottom. The magnetic recording layer 1112 is composed of a magnetic layer 1105, a concealing layer 1103, a printing layer 1102 and a printing protective layer 1101. The concealing layer 1103 is composed of an aluminum alloy thin film 1104 and a concealing coating film layer 1113 and is used as a foundation layer which conceals the color of the magnetic layer 1105 to show the layer 1102 clearly. The layer 1101 protects the layers 1102 and 1103 from wear caused by a magnetic head and, further, protects the layer 1112 from contamination. With this constitution, an apparatus which has a medium with the improved concealment of the magnetic recording layer and with little output fluctuation in it can be obtained.

Description

Detailed Description of the Invention

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a disc-shaped information recording medium having an optical recording function and a magnetic recording function at the same time.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art In the field of information media, the recording capacity of media is increasing year by year. Among them, the CDROM which performs optical reproduction has a large recording capacity and is a very useful medium because it can be manufactured at low cost. However, CDR
Since the OM itself does not have a recording function, its use tends to be limited. In order to solve these problems, a nonvolatile memory, I
A method of using a C card, a SRAM memory with a battery backup attached to a disk case, a floppy disk, etc. is used together. In addition, as one of those that meet this demand, a disk with a new media concept called a partial ROM disk has recently appeared, and a prototype is made, and expectations are increasing. This is a combination of the two advantages of the large-capacity RAM function of the RAM disk and the mass-productivity of the ROM disk for large-capacity software recording. The specific configuration is RA for magneto-optical discs, write-once discs, etc.
This is a system in which a ROM area is provided in a partial area of the M disk and software is collectively recorded at the time of disk manufacturing by a stamper. However, since the RAM disk is diverted, there is a drawback that the media is not cheap.

Generally, in the home, the production amount of information is remarkably smaller than that of companies except for AV information such as video and audio. Therefore, the consumer interactive recording medium is required to have a small RAM capacity. On the other hand, since the amount of information in newspapers and TV programs is large, the amount of information supplied to the home is large. For this reason, consumer interactive media generally require a large ROM capacity. It can be said that a memory having a large-capacity ROM and a small-capacity RAM, in other words, a "partial RAM disk" is required for consumer interactive applications. The partial RAM disk is an inexpensive ROM disk with a small RAM added at a negligibly low cost.
It is a concept to realize a consumer memory at a cost close to that of a ROM disk although the M capacity is small. One method for realizing this concept is to provide a single magnetic recording layer on the back surface of the R0M disk. In this case, the process of forming the recording layer is less than one-tenth of the cost of the ROM disk, and the ROM can be formed.
A partial RAM disk can be realized without increasing the cost of the disk.

[0004]

Problems to be Solved by the Invention JP-A-56-1635
36, JP-A-57-6446, and JP-A-57-21.
2642, as seen in JP-A-2-179951,
A method of providing an optical recording portion on the front surface of a CDROM and a magnetic recording portion on the back surface has already been proposed. In addition, JP-A-60-7
As shown in 0543, an optical recording section made of a non-magnetic material such as an optical disk using an amosphas material is provided on the front surface, a disk having a magnetic recording layer having magnetism on the back surface is used, and a magnetic head is provided on the device section on the back surface side. It is disclosed that the magnetic recording is provided. However, these documents do not disclose any important matter for concretely realizing a medium or device simply by simply combining a magnetic recording unit and an optical recording unit.

Further, a method for mass-producing an important medium for realizing the medium at a low cost, a method for making the medium conform to the CD standard, and the like, that is, a method for concretely realizing a consumer partial RAM disk, are completely absent. It has not been disclosed in the conventional example.

An object of the present invention is to provide a structure and a manufacturing method of an information recording medium having a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of an optical recording surface and having a printable surface such as a label on the entire surface of the magnetic recording layer.

[0007]

In order to achieve the above object, the magnetic recording layer of the information recording medium of the present invention has a magnetic layer, a hiding layer, a printing layer, a print protection layer and includes an alloy thin film layer in the hiding layer. The thickness variation of the masking layer or the print protection layer suppresses the variation in the distance between the magnetic layer surface and the magnetic recording layer surface, and the print protection layer surface has irregularities.

[0008]

According to the present invention, a label or the like can be printed on the surface of the magnetic recording layer of the information recording medium having the magnetic recording layer on the back surface of the optical recording surface.

[0009]

【Example】

(Embodiment 1) An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the present invention. The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 has therein a recording medium 2 including a magnetic recording layer 3, an optical recording layer 4 for optical recording, and a light transmitting layer 5.

At the time of magneto-optical reproduction, the light from the light emitting portion is converged on the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7 to reproduce the recording signal magneto-optically recorded. At the time of optical recording, the laser light is focused on a specific portion of the optical recording layer 4 by the optical head 6 and the optical recording block 7, and the temperature thereof is raised to the Curie temperature or higher. In this state, the magnetic head 8
The magnetic recording block 9 modulates the magnetic field applied to this portion to perform conventional magneto-optical recording.

At the time of magnetic recording, a magnetic signal is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 using the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9. The system control unit 10 obtains operation information and output information from each circuit, drives the drive block 11, and drives the motor 12
Control, tracking of the optical head 6, and focus control.

The detailed operation will be described below. When recording an input signal from the outside, a recording command is sent from the keyboard 15 or the external interface unit 14 to the system control unit 10 when the external input signal is received or the operator operates a key. The system control unit 10 sends an input command to the input unit 12 and sends an optical recording command to the optical recording block 7. An input from the outside, for example, an audio or video signal is input to the input unit 12 and becomes a digital signal such as PCM. This signal is sent to the input section 32 of the optical recording block 7, is subjected to error correction coding by the ECC encoder 35, and is passed through the optical circuit 37 to the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31 in the magnetic recording block 9. Through
The recording magnetic field sent to the magnetic head 8 is applied to the magneto-optical material within the specific range of the optical recording layer 4 according to the optical recording signal. Recording layer 4
The recording material in a narrower range is heated to the Curie temperature or higher by the laser light from the optical head 6, and the magnetization reversal of this portion occurs due to the above-mentioned applied magnetic field. Therefore, as the recording medium 2 rotates, as the recording medium 2 travels in the direction of the arrow 51 shown in the enlarged view of the optical recording head portion in FIG. 2, the magnetization 52 shown by the arrow in the optical recording layer 4 is generated. It is recorded one after another as shown in the figure.

At this time, the system controller 10 controls the optical recording layer 4
The tracking information, address information, and clock information recorded above are obtained from the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproducing circuit 38, and control information is given to the drive block 11 based on this information. More specifically, the system control unit 10 is the motor 1
By giving a control signal to the motor drive circuit 26, the relative speed between the optical head 6 and the recording medium 2 is controlled to a predetermined linear speed.

The optical head drive circuit 25 and the optical head actuator 18 control the light beam so that it scans a desired track, and also controls the focus so that the optical recording layer 4 is focused. When accessing another track, the actuator 23 and the head moving circuit 24 move the head base 19 to move the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 on the head base 19 in an interlocking manner. Therefore, both heads reach the desired front and back tracks at the same radial position. The head lifting unit 20 is driven by a magnetic head lifting circuit 22 and a lifting motor 21,
The magnetic head 8 and the slider 41 are the disk cassette 4
The magnetic head 8 is prevented from being worn away from the magnetic recording layer 3 on the disk surface of the recording medium 2 at the time of loading 2 or during the time when magnetic recording is not performed. As described above, the system control unit 10 sends control information to the drive block 11 to control the tracking of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8, focusing, the raising and lowering of the magnetic head 8, the rotation speed of the motor 17, and the like.

Next, a method of reproducing the magneto-optical recording signal will be described. First, using the enlarged view of the optical recording head section of FIG. 2, the laser beam from the issuing section 57 travels in the direction indicated by the optical path 59 by the polarization beam splitter 55 and is focused on the optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2 by the lens 54. Tie Focusing tracking control in this case is performed by driving only the lens 54 by the optical head drive unit 18. The magneto-optical material of the optical recording layer is in a magnetized state according to each optical recording signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the deflection angle of the reflected light shown in the optical path 59a differs depending on the magnetization direction due to the Kerr effect. This polarization angle θ is obtained by splitting the reflected light by the polarization beam splitter 55a, and
Since the magnetization direction can be detected by providing 8, 58a and taking the difference between the two received light signals, the optical recording signal can be reproduced. The operation of reproducing the optical signal is the same as that of the conventional magneto-optical recording and will not be described in further detail. This reproduction signal is sent from the optical head 6 of FIG. 1 to the optical recording block 7, and the ECC is passed through the optical head circuit 39 and the optical reproduction circuit 38.
The error is corrected in the decoder 36, the original digital signal is reproduced, and is sent to the output unit 33. The output unit 33 has a memory unit 34, in which recording signals for a fixed time are accumulated. For example, when a compressed sound signal of 250 kbps is stored using a 1 Mbit IC memory, the signal can be stored for about 4 seconds. When used as an acoustic player, if the tracking of the optical head 6 is lost due to external vibration, the acoustic signal can be removed by recovering within 4 seconds. This method is well known. The signal from the output unit 33 is sent to the output unit 13 at the final stage, and in the case of an acoustic signal, it is PCM demodulated and then output as an analog acoustic signal to the outside.

Next, the magnetic recording mode will be described. In FIG. 1, an external input signal that has entered the input section or a signal from the system control section 10 is sent to the input section 21 of the magnetic circuit block 9, and the EC in the optical recording block 7 is sent.
Encoding such as error correction is performed using the C encoder 35. The encoded signal is sent to the magnetic head by the magnetic recording circuit 29 and the magnetic head circuit 31. This will be described with reference to the enlarged view of the head portion of FIG. Is done. The recording medium 2 has a perpendicular magnetization film.

As the magnetic medium 2 travels in the direction of arrow 51,
As shown in FIG. 3, magnetic signals are recorded one after another according to the magnetic recording signals. The magnetic field in this case is also applied to the magneto-optical recording layer 4, but the coercive force of the magneto-optical recording material below the Curie temperature is several thousand to 10,000 Oe, so it is magnetized unless it is raised above the Curie temperature. And is not affected by the magnetic field of magnetic recording.

However, if the magnetically recorded portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 using the magneto-optical recording film are too close to each other, the magnetic field from the magnetic recording portion will occur in the optical recording layer 4 portion. It may reach several tens to several hundreds Oe. For magneto-optical recording under these conditions, when the temperature of the optical recording layer 4 is raised to the Curie temperature or higher by the light beam, the magnetic field from the magnetic recording layer 3 causes magnetization reversal, which increases the error rate during optical recording. Therefore, the thickness of the interference layer 81 is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 as shown in the sectional view of the recording medium in FIG. Since the protective layers 82 and 82a for preventing deterioration are provided on both sides of the optical recording layer 4, the thickness of the interference layer 81 and the sum of the protective layer 82 become the interference interval L. In this case, assuming that the magnetic recording wavelength is λ, the attenuation amount is 56.4 × L / λ, so that setting λ = 0.5 μm is effective if L is 0.2 μm or more. As shown in FIG. 8, the thickness of the protective layer 82 is set to L
Even with the above, the same effect can be obtained. A manufacturing method will be described. A protective layer 82 and an interference layer 81 are formed on the magneto-optical recording layer 4.
The magnetic recording layer 3 is formed by applying a material in which a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material having vertical anisotropy such as barium ferrite are mixed by spin coating while applying a magnetic field in the vertical direction. As a result, the recording medium 2 suitable for perpendicular magnetic recording can be obtained as shown in the sectional view of the recording medium in FIG.

The above is the case where the optical recording layer 4 for magneto-optical recording is provided, but the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of the present invention can also reproduce a ROM disk such as a CD. As shown in the sectional view of the recording medium of FIG. 9, a reflective film 84 of aluminum or the like is formed on the pit portion of the substrate 5 in which pits are engraved by sputtering or the like, and a lubricant, a binder, and a magnetic material are formed thereon. By applying the mixed material to the substrate while applying a vertical magnetic field to form a magnetic recording layer 3 having a perpendicular magnetic recording film, RO
An M-type recording medium 2 is created. This media is a CD RO
Since the function as M is on the front surface and the function as RAM is on the back surface, various effects described later can be obtained. The cost increase in this case is only that the magnetic material is added to the material for forming the protective film by the spin coating which is performed in the present CD. Therefore, the manufacturing cost is increased only by the cost of the magnetic material itself. Since this cost is several tenths of the manufacturing cost of the medium, the cost increase is extremely small.

Tracking during magnetic recording will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the system controller 10 sends a movement command to the head movement circuit 24 based on the tracking information reproduced from the optical head 6 and the optical head circuit 39, and the actuator 23.
Is driven to move the head base 19 in the tracking direction. Then, as shown in the enlarged view of the head portion only in the tracking direction of FIG. 4, the optical head 6 focuses on the vicinity of a specific optical recording track 65 of the optical recording layer 4. That is, the optical head drive unit 18 that drives the optical head 6 is mechanically coupled to the magnetic head 8 via the head base 19 and the head elevating unit 20. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 moves in the tracking direction in conjunction with the movement of the optical head. That is, if the optical head 6 is controlled to a specific optical track 66, the magnetic head 8
Moves onto a specific magnetic track 67 on the back surface of the optical track 66. Guard bands 68 on both sides of this track,
68a is provided. This is further expanded in Figure 5.
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. If the position of the optical head 6 is controlled so as to scan the specific Tn-th optical track 65, the magnetic head 8 travels on the specific Mm-th magnetic track 67 on the back surface.

In this case, only the drive system of the optical head is required, and it is not necessary to separately provide the tracking control means for the magnetic head 8. The linear sensor, which was necessary in magnetic disk drives, is no longer necessary.

Next, a method of accessing the optical track and the magnetic track will be described. The optical head 6 is tracked in conjunction with the magnetic head 8. Therefore, if the optical track information currently being recorded / reproduced from the lower surface is different from the radial position of the magnetic track to be accessed from the upper surface, both cannot be accessed at the same time. In the case of data, only slow access does not cause a fatal problem, but in the case of continuous signals such as audio signals and image signals, interruption is not allowed. Therefore, magnetic recording cannot be performed during normal-speed optical recording / reproduction. In the present embodiment, the input section 32 and the output section 33 have a memory section 34, and a method of accumulating a signal for a time several times as long as the maximum access time of magnetic recording is adopted. Therefore, as shown in the timing chart of the magnetic recording of FIG. 6, the rotational speed of the recording medium 2 during recording and reproduction is n
By doubling it, the optical recording / reproducing time T becomes 1 / n of the normal speed and becomes T1 and T2. Therefore, the time T0 which is n-1 times the recording / reproducing time from t = t3 to t = t is the margin time. From t3 to t4 during a part of the spare time T0
Access to the magnetic track during the access time Ta, magnetic recording / reproduction is performed during the recording / reproducing period TR from t4 to t6, and the original optical track or By accessing and returning to the optical track of, the optical recording and the magnetic recording can be time-divisionally accessed by one head moving unit. In this case, the margin period To
During this period, the memory unit 34 is set to have a capacity capable of accumulating continuous signals.

FIG. 6 is a magnetic recording timing chart of FIG.
Track access of the magnetic head described above will be described with reference to the cross-sectional views of the recording unit shown in FIGS. First, after the cassette 42 shown in the perspective view of the cassette of FIG. 15 is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the perspective view of the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 16, first, as shown in FIG. Optical track 6 in TOC area where information is recorded
The light beam of the optical head 6 is imaged on 5 and TOC
Information is reproduced. At this time, the magnetic head 8 travels on the magnetic track 67 on the back surface, and the magnetic recording information on this track is reproduced. In this way, as the first work, the information of the optical track in the TOC of the recording medium 2 is reproduced, and at the same time, the information of the previous access recorded on the magnetic track, the information at the time of the completion of the last work, etc. are obtained. This content is displayed on the display unit 16 as shown in FIG.

For example, in the case of acoustic information, the last music number at the end of the previous time, the elapsed time at the time of interruption, the reserved music number, etc. are automatically recorded in the magnetic recording area. Next, when the recording medium 2 is again inserted into the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus, the magnetic track 67 is added together with the index information of the optical track 65 as described above.
The information at the end of the previous time recorded in the
Is displayed as shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, the last access end time, the operator name, the last song number, the elapsed time at the time of interruption,
This shows the state in which the previously preset song order and song number are recorded and displayed. Specifically, "Contineu?" Is displayed and asked, so if you enter "Yes", music playback will resume from the point where the song with the same song number at the end of the previous time was interrupted. If you enter "No", the music will be played in the preset song order. In this way, the operator can automatically reproduce the contents that were interrupted last time or listen to them in their favorite song order. As shown in the perspective view of the game machine in FIG. 18, the game CDROM device records and reproduces the previously interrupted game contents, for example, the number of stages, the number of points acquired, and the number of items reached, so that a certain amount of time elapses after the game ends. When the user wants to restart the game by restarting the game in the same state from the same place as last time, an effect not obtained in the conventional CDROM type game machine is obtained.

The above is the case of a simple access method for accessing the magnetic track in the TOC area. In this case, the memory capacity is small, but it has the effect of being the simplest and cheapest.

Next, the junction for accessing tracks other than the TOC area will be described. FIG. 11 shows a state where the optical head 6 is accessing a specific optical track 65a. At this time, the magnetic head 8 interlocking with the optical head 6 causes the optical track 65 to move.
The magnetic track 67a on the back side of "a" is accessed. If the required magnetic recording information is on a magnetic track 67b, which is another track apart from the magnetic track 67a, the magnetic head 8
Need to be moved to the magnetic track 67b. In this case, as described in the timing chart of FIG. 6, it is necessary to complete the movement, recording, and return of the head during the allowance period To. In this case, in the TOC area or the specific area of the optical recording layer 4, the magnetic track NO. And the corresponding optical track No. Is recorded, and this information is read to read the required magnetic track N
O. Optical track NO. Can be calculated. Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the head base 19 is moved during the access time Ta so that the optical head 6 is fixed so as to access the optical track 65b of this optical track number. Then, the magnetic head 8 tracks a predetermined magnetic track 67b. Thus, magnetic recording or reproduction can be performed. In this case, while the optical track 65a is being tracked as shown in FIG. 13, the magnetic head 8 is lifted up by the elevating motor 21 and kept away from the magnetic recording layer, and the motor is moved as shown by ω in FIG. 6 during the access time Ta. Decrease the rotation speed of 17. While the rotational speed is decreasing, the magnetic head 8
Is lowered and brought into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3. This can prevent the magnetic head 8 from being destroyed. During TR, the rotational speed is increased to perform magnetic recording, during Tb, the rotational speed is decreased to raise the magnetic head 8 and, after raising, the rotational speed is increased again to return to the original optical track 65a as shown in FIG. During this period, optical recording / reproduction is performed. Since the data accumulated in the memory 34 is reproduced during this margin time T0, the continuous reading signal such as music is not interrupted. Also, as shown in FIG.
Even if the area C is being accessed, the magnetic head 8 is not lowered if there is an instruction that magnetic recording is not required in the TOC area. As a result, even if the recording medium 2 without the magnetic recording layer 3 is inserted, the accident that the magnetic head 8 is contacted and destroyed can be prevented. In this way, the magnetic head 8
By moving up and down during the period when the rotation speed is lowered, there is an effect that the destruction and friction of the magnetic head can be greatly reduced. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the cassette 42 that houses the optical recording medium 2. A shutter 88, a magnetic recording prevention claw 89, and an optical recording prevention claw 89a are provided, and recording prevention can be set separately. Of course, the ROM type cassette is provided with only the magnetic recording prevention claw 89a.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus for reproducing optical recording. The optical recording block does not include the optical recording circuit and the ECC encoder as compared with FIG. Components of the magnetic head elevating part 20, the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic recording block 9 are added as compared to a general reproducing player such as a CD player, but all the components can share the components of the magneto-optical recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. . Moreover, these costs are much lower than those of optical recording-related parts, so that the cost increase is small. Memory capacity is smaller than floppy,
Since information can be recorded in and reproduced from the ROM type recording medium at such a low cost, the above-described various effects can be obtained in the case of a game machine or a CD player that requires a small memory capacity. According to our calculation, in the case of a disk having a diameter of 60 mm, a memory capacity for magnetic recording of about 1 KB to 10 KB can be obtained by using a magnetic head for magnetic field modulation. Since the current game ROMIC is equipped with SRAM 2KB or 8KB memory, it can be said that it has a sufficient capacity.
The error correction encoder 35 and the error correction decoder 36 shown in FIG. 1 will now be described in detail by replacing the OMIC.

No error correction is performed on a normal density exchangeable magnetic disk such as a fixed disk and a widely used 3.5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk. As an example, in the case of 3.5-inch 2HD, which is currently the mainstream, it is 135 TPI, and the error rate when recording and reproducing is close to 10 ^-12 . Therefore, when placed in a cartridge, it was not necessary to use error correction, including interribs. In contrast, CDRO
When the magnetic recording layer is provided on the surface of the medium surface of M or outside of the back surface by coating, vapor deposition, or sputtering attachment,
Use without a cartridge. Therefore, a burst error occurs due to dust or scratches.

The medium of the present invention has Hc = 1900 Oe, and a magnetic recording layer having a space loss of 9 to 10 μm due to the printing layer and the protective layer is coated on the label side of the CD. This medium was recorded / reproduced 10 ⁶ times at 500 BPI, that is, a wavelength of 50 μm by MFM modulation using an amorphous laminated magnetic head having a head gap of 30 μm, and the experimental results of measuring the pulse width are shown in FIG. FIG. 203 (a) shows the measurement result of the pulse width up to 1 ms, and FIG. 203 (b) shows 10
The measurement data up to 0 μs is enlarged.

As shown by the arrow 51a in FIG. 203 (a), a long cycle burst error occurs for 10 ⁶ times. Therefore, the ECC encoding is performed before and after the interleaving as shown in FIG.

Here, error correction will be quantitatively described in detail from actual experimental data of the present invention. FIG. 203 (b)
At ¹⁰⁶ times As it can be seen from, 1T of MFM modulation, 1.
There is a sufficient gap between 5T and 2T. Therefore, considering a case where the conditions are bad, an error rate of about 10 ⁻⁵ to 10 ⁻⁶ may occur.

The occurrence of burst errors is so large that it cannot be seen in a disk such as a floppy disk loaded in a cartridge.
There are also several orders of magnitude more random errors. In other words, it can be seen that interleaving and strong error correction are necessary to use without a cartridge. However, if the error correction code amount is increased too much, the redundancy increases and the data amount decreases. Therefore, as a target value for the burst error countermeasure, the CD scratch tolerance standard is used as a reference. The probability of scratches on the outer surface is the same on both the optical recording surface and the label surface. Figure 204 is C
The error correction capability for scratches on the optical recording surface in the case of D is shown. When 4 symbols are corrected, a flaw of 14 frames at the maximum, that is, a flaw having a size of 2.38 mm can be corrected. The interleave length is 108 frames, that is, 18.36 mm. Therefore, 2.3 is also applied to the magnetic recording layer.
An error correction capability including interleaving is required so that an error can be corrected for a scratch of 8 mm or less. By doing so, even if the user treats the magnetic recording portion in the same manner as a conventional CD or CD-ROM and the magnetic recording portion is scratched, the error correction including the interleave of the present invention, the encoder 35.
The error is corrected by the decoder 36 and no data error occurs. Therefore, a great effect is obtained in that even if the CD is scratched, the data reproduction is not hindered at all. The effect is that the user can handle it as easily as a CD.

In the case of the present invention, the interleave of 18 mm or more and the error correction of Reed-Solomon are used, and as shown in FIG. It was confirmed by an experiment that a scratch of 3 mm can be corrected in the part. It has been found that under these conditions, it is possible to correct a scratch of 2.38 mm or more, which is equivalent to a CD. That is, FIG.
As shown in 05, the interleave length L _D on the data is taken and the physical interleave table L _{M is set} to 18 mm or more on the medium surface. Then, as shown in the error rate diagram of FIG. 206, by setting the data amount of the error correction code such as Reed-Solomon to a value 0.08 to 0.32 times the original data, it is possible to perform the error correction for the scratches equivalent to the CD. That is a great effect. In this case, since it is possible to correct the error with the minimum required redundancy corresponding to a scratch on the level of a CD, the overall data recording / reproducing efficiency is optimized, and the substantial effect of maximizing the actual recording capacity is obtained.

Here, the overall circuit configuration will be described. Figure 20
2 is an error correction encoder 35 and a decoder 3 of FIG.
6 in detail, the magnetic recording signal is a Reed-Solomon decoder 35a for performing a Reed-Solomon encoding operation.
Interleaved part 3 after ECC circle code by
5b, as shown in FIG. 207, the data is dispersed and recorded on the deinterleave 36b and Reed-Solomon magnetic recording. In the deinterleave 36b shown in FIG. 208, the reproduced signal is once mapped to the RAM 36x, and then the address conversion is performed in the reverse order to that in the case of FIG. 207, so that the magnetically recorded data dispersedly recorded is returned to the original array. Will be returned. Then, in the Reed-Solomon decoder 36a shown in FIG. 209 (b), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 210, for example, P and Q parities and recording data are input in step 452b, and the syndromes S ₁ and S ₂ are calculated in step 452c. S ₁ = S ₂ at 452d
Only when = 0, the process proceeds to step 452g to output the data. When there is an error, the error correction calculation is performed in step 452e, and the data is output in step 452g only when the error is corrected in step 452f. The CD has a high data rate and the EFM demodulation clock is 4.321.
It is 8 MHz. Therefore, for error correction, data processing is performed using a dedicated IC. However, the demodulation clock of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit of the present invention is 30 Kbps and the data rate is 1/100 of that of the CD, as shown in the experimental data of FIG. Focusing on the point that this data processing amount is small,
In the block diagram of 02, the dedicated I
While using C, the signal processing of the error correction encoding unit 35 and the error correction decoding unit 36 of the magnetic recording / reproducing signal is performed by using one microcomputer 10a for the block including the system control unit 10 surrounded by a thick dotted frame. , Time division in FIG.
7 and the error correction calculation shown in the flowchart of FIG. 210. As a result, it is not necessary to newly add an interleave and an error correction circuit, and thus an effect that the configuration is young and simple can be obtained.

The block diagram of FIG. 211 adopts a method of performing error correction once before and after interleaving.
Although the arrangement is changed, the basic configuration is the same as that in FIGS. 1 and 202, and therefore the description thereof is omitted and only the error correction unit will be described. First, the magnetic recording data is C in the error correction code part 35.
ECC with 2 Reed-Solomon error correction encoder 35a
212 is encoded, C2 parity 45 is added, and the data in the horizontal direction of the arrow 51a direction in the table is read out in the direction of arrow 51b and the vertical direction in the interleave unit 35b as shown in FIG. 212 (a). After the data is output as described above, for example, A1 and A2 are dispersed by the dispersion distance L1, the Reed-Solomon C1 error correction encoder 35c performs vertical error correction encoding to add C1 parity 453, and Magnetically recorded on. During reproduction, after being demodulated by the MFM demodulator 30d, random errors are first corrected by the Reed-Solomon C1 error correction unit by C1 parity, and then the deinterleave unit 3 is used.
6b, the data is mapped in the RAM 36x of FIG. 208, and is converted into the data in the horizontal direction of the original table by the reverse address conversion of FIG. 212 and is output. In this way, burst errors are dispersed and become random errors. After this, FIG.
In the Reed Solomon C2 error correction unit 36a, the random error is corrected and error-free data is reproduced and output.

In the case of the method of FIG. 211, since error correction is performed in two stages before and after interleaving, the effect of being stronger against burst errors can be obtained. In the case of the present invention, as shown by the experimental data, the one-step error correction shown in FIG. 202 is sufficient. Although the basic system is realized by one-step correction, it is desirable to use the two-step error correction shown in FIG. 211 when recording / reproducing specially important data such as a personal identification number or an amount of money.

As described above, since the influence of scratches is unavoidable in the hybrid media having the magnetic recording portion on the outer surface of the CD without the cartridge, normal data cannot be output in the conventional floppy configuration. By carrying out one-stage or two-stage error correction and interleaving as shown in FIGS. 202 and 211, there is an effect that data recording and reproduction can be surely performed, and the practicality is enhanced. effective.

(Second Embodiment) A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 19 is an overall block diagram of the second embodiment. 19 shows the magnetic head 8a shown in FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment.
And a magnetic head circuit 31a are added. Since the other parts are the same, the description is omitted. As in the enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 20, first, the magnetic head 8 performs magnetic recording with a long recording wavelength over the entire magnetic recording layer 3, as in the first embodiment. Next, the magnetic head 8a
Performs magnetic recording with a short recording wavelength on the surface layer portion 3a. Then, finally, magnetic recording can be performed on the surface layer portion 3a with an independent channel of a short wavelength subchannel and on the deep layer portion 3b with an independent channel of a long wavelength main channel. As a result, when a long-wavelength magnetic head such as the magnetic head for magnetic field modulation of Example 1 is used to reproduce the magnetic recording layer having two-layer recording as shown in FIG. 20 of Example 2. , The above main channels can be played. Therefore, if the summary information is recorded in the main channel and the detailed information is recorded in the sub channel, the summary information can be obtained even in the method of the first embodiment, and the compatibility between the two can be obtained. The enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 21 shows a case where only the short wavelength magnetic head 8 is mounted. In this case, the signal in which the main channel is superimposed on the above-mentioned sub-channel signal is reproduced, and both the main and sub channels are reproduced. Since the data can be reproduced, the cost can be reduced by adopting this configuration in the case of a reproduction-only machine. In the enlarged view of the magnetic head portion of FIG. 22, the upper part of the drawing is a magnetic field modulation head, that is, the case where recording is performed by the magnetic head 8 suitable for a long wavelength.
If the non-magnetized portion is 0, the magnetized regions 1 and 120a are 12
0 is recorded at 0b and 1 is recorded at 120C, and a data string 121 of "101" is obtained. As shown in the lower part of the figure, assuming that the N pole portion is 1 and the non-magnetized portion is 0 using the perpendicular magnetic head 8b suitable for a short wavelength, the data string 122 indicates "101".
10110 ", which is the same area 1 as the upper area 120a
8 bits can be recorded in 20d. When the signal of this area 120d is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, only the N pole is present, so "1"
To judge. This is the same as the area 120a. That is, "1" in the data string 122a can be reproduced. Next, in the region 120e, the S pole portion is "0" and the non-magnetized portion is "1".
If you define, "0100101"
0 "and 8 bits are recorded. When this is reproduced by the magnetic head 8, it is judged as" 0 "because it has only the south pole.
It is a signal having the same polarity as that of the region 120b is reproduced with a slightly weaker amplitude. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22, in the magnetic head 8b for short wavelength, the data string 122a of the main channel D1 is used.
And the signal of the data string 122 of the sub-channel D2 are recorded and reproduced, and the magnetic head 8 for long wavelength for magnetic field modulation reproduces the data string 122a of the main channel D1.
The effect that both are compatible can be obtained. The gap of the magnetic head 8 for magnetic field modulation is 0.2 to 2 μm.

(Embodiment 3) A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of the recording portion of the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, first, on the transparent substrate 5 of the recording medium 2, the reflective film 8 having the pits as shown in FIG.
4 and the magnetic recording film 3 are the same, but C
0-Ferrite is formed by plasma CVD or the like. Since this material has a light-transmitting property, it has a high light-transmitting property when the thickness is thin.

As shown in FIG. 23, a focus 66 is formed on the medium from the back side by the optical head 6. The lens 54 of the optical head 6 is connected to the slider 41 made of a light transmitting material by a connecting portion 150 having a spring effect. Further, the magnetic head 8 is embedded in the slider 41. Therefore, the optical head reads the pits of the reflective film 84 from the back side, and tracking and focus are controlled. Then, the slider connected to this is subjected to tracking control and travels on a specific optical track. The positional error between the lens 54 and the slider 41 is generated only by the spring effect of the connecting portion 150, so that the slider 41 is controlled in the order of microns. Next, since the up and down direction is interlocked with the focus control, it is controlled in the order of several microns to several + microns.

Then, magnetic recording is successively performed on the magnetic recording layer 3. In the case of the present embodiment, since optical tracking is possible, there is a great effect that a track pitch of several microns can be realized. Further, since the slider 41 and the magnetic head 8 are controlled in the vertical direction by the focus control, they follow the surface accuracy of the substrate 5 of the recording medium 2 even if it is poor. For this reason, since a substrate having poor surface accuracy can be used, there is an effect that a plastic substrate or a non-polished glass substrate, which is much lower in cost than a polished glass substrate, can be used.

Further, FIG. 23 shows the case of reproducing from the back surface of the recording medium 2 by the optical head 6. However, since it is possible to reproduce the same recording medium from the surface by a mechanism like a conventional optical disk player, there is an effect of compatibility. Then, there is a remarkable effect that a memory capacity larger than that of the conventional one by one digit or more can be obtained by the optical tracking.

(Embodiment 4) A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 24 shows a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described.
The difference between the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the first embodiment, the magnetic head 8 uses the magneto-optical recording magnetic field modulation head as it is, so that the perpendicular recording is performed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 25, the magnetic recording layer of the recording medium 3 is used by using the magnetic head 8 having two functions of magnetic field modulation for magneto-optical recording and horizontal magnetic recording. Three
Record horizontally. The equivalent head gap of the magnetic field modulation head of the first embodiment, for example, the MD head, is usually 100.
Since it is as large as μm or more, the recording wavelength λ becomes a long wavelength of several hundred μm. In this case, a demagnetizing field is generated and the magnetic charge actually recorded is attenuated, so that the reproduction output is lowered. The first embodiment has an extremely great advantage that the cost does not increase because no configuration change is required, but has a disadvantage that the reproduction output decreases.

Horizontal recording is more suitable when high reproduction output is required for long wavelength recording. In order to realize the horizontal recording, the fourth embodiment basically changes the recording system from the vertical recording to the horizontal recording by changing the configuration of the magnetic head in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 25, the magnetic head 8 of the fourth embodiment has a main pole 8a that also functions as a magnetic head for magnetic field modulation, a sub-pole 8b for forming a closed magnetic path, and a head gap 8c having a gap length L and a coil. It consists of 40. This magnetic head 8 can be regarded as a ring head having a gap length L during horizontal recording. In addition, when magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording is performed, a uniform magnetic field is applied to the optical recording layer 4. First, in the magnetic recording mode shown in FIG. 25, the optical head 6 focuses on the optical recording layer 4 to read track information or address information, and the optical head 6 controls so that the focus 66 of a predetermined optical track tracks. To be done. Along with this, the magnetic head 8 connected to the optical head 6 also runs on a predetermined magnetic track.
FIG. 25 is a view as seen from the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction. As the recording medium 2 travels in the direction of arrow 51, the magnetic recording block 9
Horizontal magnetic recording signals 61 are successively recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 in accordance with the recording signals sent from the magnetic recording layer 3. If the gap length is L and the recording wavelength is λ, then λ> 2L. Therefore, the smaller the gap length L, the larger the recording capacity can be.
However, when L is made small, the range of the uniform magnetic field becomes narrow when the modulating magnetic field for magneto-optical recording is generated. For this reason, the recordable range of the focal point 66 of the optical head becomes narrower, and the dimensional accuracy of the recording medium and the tracking mechanism must be increased, which increases the cost. As shown in the enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording in FIG. 26, when performing the magneto-optical recording, the laser light from the optical head 6 heats the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 to reach the Curie temperature or higher. Then, the modulation magnetic field 8 by the magnetic head 8
The portion of the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is magnetized in the same direction as the magnetic field direction of 5, and the optical recording signals 52 are recorded one after another. In this case, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 facing each other depends on the dimensional accuracy of the tracking mechanism such as the head base 19 as described above. In the case of MD, the standard of dimensional accuracy is loose to reduce the cost. Therefore, in consideration of the worst condition, the positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 may be greatly changed. Therefore, the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e is required to be as wide as possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, by providing the narrowed portion 8d on the main magnetic pole portion 8a of the magnetic head 8, the magnetic fluxes 85a and 85b on the right side are converged and the magnetic field is strengthened. Therefore, the magnetic flux 85c, 85d, 85e, 85f
And has the effect of expanding the uniform magnetic field region 8e. In this way, even if the relative positional relationship between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is deviated and the relative position between the focal point 66 and the magnetic head 8 is deviated, an optimum modulation magnetic field is obtained when the focal point 66 is within the uniform magnetic field region 8e. , The magneto-optical recording is surely performed, and the error rate is not deteriorated.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording portion of FIG. 31, the magnetic flux of the magnetic recording signal 61 of the magnetic recording layer 3 is the magnetic flux 8.
6a, 86b, 86c, 86d. Therefore, at the time of magneto-optical recording, the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a due to the magnetic recording signal 61 and the magnetic head 8 are applied to the magneto-optical recording material at the focal point 66 portion of the optical recording layer 4 which has reached the Curie temperature or higher due to the focal point 66.
Two magnetic fields of the modulation magnetic field from are added. If the magnitude of the magnetic field of the magnetic flux 86a is larger than the magnitude of the modulating magnetic field from the magnetic head 8, the magneto-optical recording by the modulating magnetic field in this portion will not operate normally. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the magnitude of the magnetic flux 86a to a certain value or less. Therefore, the interference layer 81 having the thickness d is provided between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the optical recording layer 4 to reduce the influence. When the shortest recording wavelength of the magnetic recording signal 61 is λ, the strength of the magnetic flux 66 in the optical recording layer 4 is attenuated by about 54.6 × d / λ. In the case of a recording medium, various recording wavelengths λ can be used. Λ = 0.5μ for the shortest recording wavelength
m is common. In this case d is 60 if 0.5 μm
Since the attenuation is about dB, the influence of the magnetic recording signal 61 is almost eliminated.

From the above, the effect of eliminating the influence of the magnetic recording signal on the magneto-optical recording by using the interference film of at least 0.5 μm for the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magneto-optical recording layer 4 of the recording medium 2. Is obtained. In this case, the interference film is made of a non-magnetic material or a magnetic material having a small holding force.

When performing magneto-optical recording and magnetic recording using a magneto-optical recording medium, if the modulating magnetic field of the magneto-optical recording is sufficiently smaller than the coercive force of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer, the modulating magnetic field is recorded in the recorded magnetic signal. There is no possibility of damage. However, when the ring head is used as in Example 4, a strong magnetic field is generated in the head cap portion. Therefore, even if the modulation magnetic field is weak, the magnetic signal may be affected and the error rate may increase. In order to avoid this, when a magneto-optical recording medium is mounted for recording, as shown in the sectional view of the recording portion of FIG. 27, the optical recording is planned before the main recording signal is recorded on the optical recording layer by the optical head 6. The magnetic recording signal recorded on the magnetic track 67g on the back surface of the optical track 65g in the area is transferred to the memory section 34 of the recording / reproducing apparatus or the optical recording layer and saved. By saving, there is no problem even if the data in the magnetic recording layer is destroyed by the modulating magnetic field during magneto-optical recording.

This will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The flow chart is roughly divided into six. The discriminating step 201 discriminates the attribute of the disc, and in the case of the optical ROM disc, the reproduction only step 20
4 is used. When reproducing the optical RAM disk, a reproducing step 202 and, if necessary, a reproducing / transferring step 203 are performed. When recording on an optical RAM disk, a recording step 205 and optionally a recording / transcription step 206 are used. If there is free time, only transcription is performed in transcription step 207.

This flowchart will be described in detail. In the determination step 201, the recording medium 2, specifically a disc, is loaded in step 220. In step 221, the disc type, for example, ROM or RAM,
The distinction between the magneto-optical medium, the optical recording prohibition, the magnetic recording prohibition, and the like is discriminated by a claw or the like engraved on the cassette of the disk in FIG. Next, in step 222, the optical head 6 is moved to the positions of the innermost optical track 65a and magnetic track 67a in FIG. In step 223, the data of the optical information and magnetic information of the TOC is read out, and the data such as the music number at the end of the previous time for a music disc and the end stage number of the game for a game disc are input. In addition, if the user wishes to continue, the state at the end of the previous time can be restored. In step 224, the untranscribed flag written in the magnetic TOC is read. If the untranscribed flag = 1, it means that the magnetic data that has not been transcribed remains in the optical data section. Further, if the untransferred flag = 0, it means that there is no transfer flag. In step 225, it is discriminated whether the disc is a magneto-optical disc or a ROM disc. If the disc is a ROM disc, the process goes to step 238. If it is the magneto-optical disc, step 226.
Head to. If there is a reproduction command in step 238, the optical recording signal and the magnetic recording signal are reproduced in step 239,
When the operation is completed in step 240, various changes occurring during the reproduction period, for example, the change of the reproduction music order and the condition of the music number at the end time are written in the TOC area of the magnetic track in step 241. After the writing is completed, the disc is ejected at step 242.

Now, return to the case of the magneto-optical disk in step 226. If there is a reproduction command, the process proceeds to step 227, and if not, the process proceeds to step 243. In step 227, the reproduction of the main recording signal on the optical recording surface is performed faster than the normal reproduction speed, and the signals are sequentially stored in the memory. In the case of a music signal, in order to be able to store data for several seconds, the music is not interrupted even if the reproduction is interrupted during this period. When the memory becomes full in step 228, the unposted flag = 1 in step 229.
In the case of, the reproduction of the main recording signal is interrupted, and the process proceeds to step 230 in the reproduction transcription step 203. Check if all sub-recording signals on the magnetic recording surface have been played back.
If so, the process proceeds to step 234, and if No, the process proceeds to step 231, where the sub-recording signal on the magnetic recording surface is reproduced and stored in the memory. In step 232, it is checked whether the main recording signal in which the music signal or the like is accumulated can be output. If No, the process returns to step 227 to reproduce and accumulate the main recording signal. If Yes, when the sub recording signal reaches the set memory amount in Step 233, it is checked again in Step 234 whether the main recording signal can be accumulated and reproduced, and if Yes, the sub recording signal stored in the memory in Step 235. Is transferred to the transfer area of the optical recording surface, and it is checked in step 236 whether transfer of all data is completed. If No, step 23
The transfer is continued by returning to 0, and if Yes, the untransferred flag is changed from 1 to 0 in step 237 and the process returns to step 226.

When recording on the optical recording layer, the process proceeds to step 243 in the recording step 205 to check the recording command, and if Yes, the main recording signal is stored in the memory at step 244 and optical recording is not performed. In step 245, it is checked whether there is enough memory. If No, step 2
Optical recording of the main recording signal is performed at 45a, and the process returns to step 243. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 246. If the untranscribed flag is not 1, the process returns to step 243. If the flag is 1, the process proceeds to step 247 in the record transcription step 206. In step 247, the main recording signal is stored in the memory and at the same time the optical recording is planned to be performed this time.
The sub-recording signal of the magnetic track 67g on the back side of is reproduced and stored in the memory. In step 248, it is confirmed whether or not the main recording signal storage memory has a margin. If Yes, step 248a
If the sub recording signal is transferred to the optical recording layer at No, the process returns to step 245a to perform optical recording. In step 249, confirm whether the transfer of all data has been completed. If Yes, step 25
At 0, the unposted flag is changed from 1 to 0, and step 243
Return to. If No, the process is returned to step 243 without any change.

In step 243, it is checked whether or not there is a recording command. If No, step 25 in the transfer step 207.
Go to 1. Since neither recording nor reproducing of the main recording signal is required here, only the sub recording signal of the magnetic data surface is transcribed to the optical data surface. In step 251, the sub recording signal is reproduced and stored in the memory, and in step 252, it is transferred to the optical recording layer. Check whether all postings are completed in step 253,
If No, the process returns to step 251 again to continue transcription. Ye
If s, in step 254, the unposted flag is changed from 1 to 0, and in step 255, it is checked whether or not all the operations have been completed.
Then, the process returns to the first step 226. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 256, the information changed in this work and the information that the untransferred flag = 0 is magnetically recorded in the TOC area of the magnetic track, and the disc is ejected in step 257 to perform the work concerning this one disc. Complete.

In step 256, the magnetic recording layer can be restored to the state before the optical recording by writing all the sub recording signals accumulated in the memory again to the magnetic recording layer.

As described above, among the data on the magnetic recording surface, the data of only the magnetic track which is destroyed by the modulation magnetic field of the optical recording is saved in the memory or the optical recording surface, so that the data destruction on the magnetic recording surface is substantially caused. It has the effect of preventing it.

Further, after the optical recording operation is completed, the saved data is recorded again on the magnetic track and restored, so that even if magneto-optical recording is performed, the data on the magnetic recording surface is restored when the disc is ejected.

In the case of FIG. 28, a method is used in which data having a possibility of destroying the magnetic recording surface is transferred to the optical recording surface before magneto-optical recording. On the other hand, FIG.
In the case of the flowchart of (1), the method of not transcribing to the optical recording surface is used. The determination step 201, the reproduction step 202, and the reproduction-only step 204 in the flowchart of FIG.
28 is the same as that in FIG. 28, and therefore its description is omitted. Further, since the transcription is not performed, the reproduction transcription step 203, the recording transcription step 206, and the transcription step 207 are unnecessary. Only the recording step 205 is different and will be described in detail below.

Step 226 in the reproduction step 202
Check if there is a playback command and if No, step 2
64. If Yes, go to step 260. In step 260, the optical track corresponding to each magnetic track is managed, the applicable magnetic track destroyed by the magneto-optical recording on the back surface of the optical track is calculated, and it is checked whether it is the same applicable track as the one saved the last time Yes. Then, in step 263, magneto-optical recording is performed on the optical track. N
If it is o, the previous magnetic track data can be completely restored by writing the save data to the previous magnetic track in step 261. Next, at step 262, the data of the corresponding magnetic track to be destroyed this time is read and saved in the memory. After that, recording is performed on the optical track in step 263, and the process returns to step 243. No in step 243
In step 261a, the previous magnetic track is restored, and in step 264 of the end step 206, it is checked whether the operation is completed. If No, the process returns to step 226, and Y
If it is es, in step 265, information changed from the mounting of this disc to the end thereof, for example, the ending music number of music is magnetically recorded. Then, in step 266, the disc is ejected.
In this way, the work is finished, and when the next disc is loaded, the work is started again from step 220.

In the case of FIG. 28, all the magnetic data is transferred to the optical recording layer so that the magnetic data may be destroyed by the optical recording, whereas in the case of FIG. The data is managed, and only the magnetic data of the corresponding magnetic track that is scheduled to be destroyed by magneto-optical recording is stored in the read memory. This magnetic track is completely restored at the time of optical recording on the disk. As a result, the memory capacity for magnetic tracks of 1 to 3 can be dealt with, and the memory can be reduced. As is clear from the flowchart, magnetic data can be protected from destruction of magneto-optical recording by simple processing.

As shown in the sectional view when the magneto-optical disk is mounted in FIG. 30A and the sectional view when the CD is mounted in FIG. 30B, the same mechanism is used to reproduce the magneto-optical disk and the CD. You can also In this case, in the case of a CD, since the outside is not protected by the cartridge, it is easily affected by external magnetism. For example, the coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CD is 1000 to 3
000 Oe, which is much higher than the magnetic recording layer of the magneto-optical medium, has the effect of preventing the destruction of magnetic data by an external magnetic field. In the case of a magneto-optical disk, if the coercive force is increased, the magnitude of the modulating magnetic field in the magneto-optical recording layer approaches, so that the influence is exerted. Therefore 1000
It is lower than Oe.

(Embodiment 5) A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. 32 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment has the same configuration and basic operation as those of FIGS. 1 and 24 described in the first and fourth embodiments. Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described. The difference between the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the fourth embodiment, magnetic recording, reproduction of a magnetic recording signal, and magneto-optical recording are performed by the ring type magnetic head 8 having one coil 40 as described with reference to FIGS. This is a system in which one coil performs the three functions of generating a modulated magnetic field for use.
For this reason, the structure is simple, but there are contradictory elements in order to make the three compatible, and there is a possibility that problems such as reduction in reproduction efficiency and narrowness of the uniform magnetic field region may occur. Therefore, it is difficult to design the head and also difficult to process.

In other words, since the wiring circuit is simple because the structure is simple, it is difficult in terms of design and processing.

In view of this point, the fifth embodiment has two coils, that is, a magnetic field modulation coil 40a and a magnetic recording coil 40b, as shown in an enlarged view of magnetic recording in FIG. Returning to the block diagram of FIG. 32, at the time of magnetic recording or reproduction, the magnetic head circuit 31 applies a current to the magnetic recording coil 40b or receives a current from the coil to perform magnetic recording and reproduction.

When performing magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording,
A magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the optical recording circuit 37 applies a modulation signal to the magnetic field modulation coil 40a to perform magneto-optical recording.

The operation during magnetic recording and reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The recording current from the magnetic head circuit 31 flows through the coil 40b in the arrow direction. Then the magnetic flux 86c, 8
A closed magnetic circuit of 6a and 86b is formed, and the magnetic recording signal 61 is recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3 one after another. Horizontal magnetic recording is used. In this case, basically no current flows through the magnetic field modulation coil 40a. With this structure, a closed magnetic circuit including the gap 8c is formed, and the reproduction sensitivity can be optimally designed.

Next, the operation at the time of magneto-optical recording will be described with reference to the enlarged view of magneto-optical recording shown in FIG. Magnetic field modulation coil 4
0a is wound in the same direction on both the main magnetic pole 8a and the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b of the yoke. Therefore, when the modulation current flows from the magnetic field modulation circuit 37a in the direction of the arrow 51a, downward magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are generated. The magnetization of the magneto-optical recording material having a Curie temperature or higher at the focal point 66 of the optical recording layer 4 is reversed by this magnetic field, and the optical recording signal 52 is recorded. In this case, the strength of the magnetic field at the focal point 66 is generally 5 in the range of the uniform magnetic field region 8e.
It is set to 0 to 150 Oe. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25, it is preferable to provide the interference layer 81 so that the magnetization of the magneto-optical recording material is not reversed by the magnetic recording signal 61. If this thickness is d, then λ> d. With the configuration of FIG. 34, the effect that the uniform magnetic field region 8e can be widened is obtained. Further, since the head can be designed independently for the two coils, there is an effect that the optimum magnetic field modulation characteristic, the optimum magnetic recording characteristic and the optimum magnetic reproducing characteristic can be obtained. Since the head gap 8c in FIG. 33 can be reduced, the wavelength during magnetic recording can be shortened. In addition, since the optimum design for forming the closed magnetic circuit can be performed, the reproduction sensitivity is also improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when the magnetic field is modulated, the magnetic flux 8 of the main pole 8a is
The magnetic flux 85d of the auxiliary magnetic pole 8a and the magnetic flux 85d of the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b are in the same direction.
A strong magnetic field is not generated in the gap portion 8c unlike the case. Only a weak magnetic field of the modulating magnetic field is generated. The coercive force of the magnetic recording layer 3 is 800 to 1500 Oe, which is sufficiently higher than that of the modulation magnetic field and has an easy axis of magnetization in the horizontal direction, so that the magnetic recording signal 61 is not destroyed by the modulation magnetic field. Therefore, in Example 4, data is not destroyed by making the coercive force Hc of the magnetic recording layer 3 higher than the recording magnetic field Hmax of the magneto-optical recording material. In this case, since it is sufficient to allow a double margin, Hc <2Hmax. The recording medium 2 shown in FIG. 8 may be manufactured. Further, the magnetic head 8 is shown in FIG.
It is also possible to independently wind the coil 40a on the main magnetic pole 8a and the coil 40b on the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b as shown in FIG. in this case,
At the time of magnetic field modulation, a magnetic flux 85d is generated by applying a modulation current in the direction of arrow 51b to the magnetic recording coil 40b by using the magnetic head circuit 31. Become, fig 3
An effect similar to that of 4 can be obtained.

Also, wind one winding as shown in FIG. 36,
By providing the tap 40c, two coils can be configured with three terminals. The taps 40c and 40e are used during magnetic recording.

Further, at the time of magneto-optical recording, a modulating magnetic field for magneto-optical recording can be generated by using taps 40d and 40e as shown in FIG. As a result, the head can be configured with three taps, which has the effect of simplifying the wiring.

(Embodiment 6) A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 38 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of the sixteenth embodiment. The sixth embodiment is the first and fourth embodiments, and particularly the fifth embodiment, and the basic operation is the same as that of FIGS. 1 and 24 and 32 described above.
Therefore, detailed description is omitted and only different parts will be described. The difference between the sixth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is shown. In the fifth embodiment, one coil is provided separately from the magnetic modulation coil to perform magnetic recording. Therefore, degaussing and recording cannot be performed at the same time. However, the floppy disk requires simultaneous operation. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the magnetic head 8 is provided with two gaps 8c and 8e. Further, two coils 40b and 40f are connected to the magnetic head circuit 31, one of which is used for recording and the other of which is used for degaussing. In this way, degaussing and recording can be performed simultaneously with one head.

Next, an enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion of FIG. 39 shows a specific structure of the magnetic head 8. As shown in FIG. 33, in addition to the auxiliary magnetic pole 8b, a second auxiliary magnetic pole 8d is added. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the magnetic recording coil 4
0b for magnetic recording, but before that, the second auxiliary pole 8d
Thus, a degaussing current is made to flow from the magnetic head circuit 31. Thus, the magnetic recording layer 3 can be demagnetized in the gap 8e before recording. Therefore, when magnetic recording is performed in the gap 8c, ideal recording can be performed, and C / N and S / N
Is improved and the error rate is reduced. The top view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 41 shows this state as viewed from the vertical direction of the recording medium 2. As shown in FIG. 41, guard hands 67f and 67g are provided on both sides of the recording track 67. First, degaussing is performed with the width of the degaussing region 210 by the gap 8e of the second auxiliary magnetic pole 8d. Therefore, the entire area of the recording track 67 and the guard bands 67f and 67g are
A part of the area is demagnetized. Therefore, the gap 8c does not deviate from the degaussing region 210 even if the magnetic head 8 is displaced from the track. Therefore, when magnetic recording is performed using the gap 8c, recording can be performed in a good state.

As shown in the top view of the magnetic recording portion of FIG. 42, the degaussing gap is divided into gaps 8e and 8h.
It is also possible to provide two. As a result, the recording medium 2 is made to travel in the direction of the arrow 51 in the opposite direction in FIG. And record. The overlapping portion is demagnetized by the two degaussing regions 210a and 210b. Therefore, the guard bands 67f and 67g are completely secured. As a result, crosstalk between recording tracks is reduced, and the error rate is reduced. Next, a case where the magnetic head 8 is used to perform magnetic field modulation of the magneto-optical recording will be described with reference to an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulation unit in FIG. Since the magnetic field modulation coil 40a is wound around the main magnetic pole 8a, the sub magnetic 8b, and the second sub magnetic 8d, the magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d, and 85e are evenly generated in each magnetic pole. Therefore, there is an effect that a wide uniform magnetic field region 8e can be obtained. For this reason, even if the dimensional accuracy of the track position is low, the focal point 66 cannot deviate from the optical recording track 65.

Next, in the magnetic head 8 shown in the enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in FIG. 43, the winding method of the coil of the magnetic head 8 described in FIG. 39 is changed. As shown in the figure, the magnetic field modulation coil 40d is extended to serve also as a magnetic recording coil, and an intermediate tap 40c is provided. Thereby, magnetic recording can be performed by the taps 40c and 40e. Further, as shown in an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulation unit 44 in FIG. 44, currents in the directions of the arrows 51a and 51b are made to flow through the taps 40d and 40e by causing the arrows 51c to flow through the tap 40f, whereby magnetic fluxes 85a, 85b, 85c in the same direction, 85d,
85e is generated and a uniform modulation magnetic field is generated. In this case, there is an effect that the number of taps is reduced by one and the configuration is simplified. As described in detail above, by using the magnetic head 8 of the sixth embodiment, there is a great effect that one head can share the degaussing head, the magnetic recording head, and the magnetic field modulation head for magneto-optical recording.

(Embodiment 7) A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. The seventh embodiment mainly relates to a disk cassette for storing a medium. The top view of the disc cassette in FIG. 45A shows a state in which the movable shutter 301 of the disc cassette 42 is closed. Thus, not only the head hole 302 but also the liner holes 303a, 303b, and 303c are protected by the shutter 301, so that there is an effect that dust does not enter. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the shutter opens as the disc cassette 42 is inserted into the main body in the direction of arrow 51. Therefore, the head hole 302 and the liner holes 303a, 303
Both b and 303c open. As shown in FIG. 46, the rectangular unit 1
The liner hole 303 may be provided. 47 and 48
Head hole 302 as shown in the top view of the disk cassette
You may provide the liner hole in the opposite direction. In this case
As shown in the top views of the liners 9 (a), 9 (b), and 9 (c), the liner 304 and the liner support portion 305 made of a leaf spring or a plastic sheet and the liner support portion plate attaching portion 3 are shown.
According to 06a-d, the liner has a movable liner portion 305a.
The other parts are fixed to the disc cassette 42. Figure 4
As shown in FIG. 9C, the liner groove 307 is dug in the cassette half. In this groove 307, the liner movable part 3
05a is stored. From above the sub liner support 30
5b holds it down. Thus, the liner support portion 305a
Due to the restoring force of the spring, it keeps a flat plate state unless external force is applied. In this state, the liner 303 does not contact the recording layer on the surface of the recording medium 2. For this reason, the wear of the recording layer 3 is normally prevented.

Next, if an external force is applied from the liner hole 303 toward the inside of the disc cassette 42 by the liner pin 310 as necessary, the liner support portion 305 and the liner 304 are pressed against the medium surface. The recording layer of the recording medium 2 does not contact with 305.

Another structure of the disc cassette is shown in FIGS. 50 (a), (b) and (c), in which the leaf spring of the liner support portion 303a is preliminarily deformed in the upper direction of the disc cassette as shown in FIG. 50 (c). Keep it. As a result, when it is fixed to the disc cassette 42 as shown in FIG. 50 (d), it is constantly pressed against the cassette half upper portion 42a. Therefore, the recording medium 2 and the liner 304 do not come into contact with each other unless they are pushed downward by the liner pin 310. Sub liner support 3
The effect that 05b can be omitted is stably obtained.

Next, a method of switching the contact between the liner and the disc by the liner pin 310 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along the line AA ′ of FIG. 49 (a). The liner pin 310 is pulled up in the liner pin guide 311 in the direction of arrow 51a. Therefore liner 3
04 and the recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 are not in contact with each other. Therefore, since the frictional force when the recording medium 2 is rotated is small, the recording medium 2 can be rotated even with a weak driving force. Next, as shown in FIG. 52, when the liner pin 310 is pushed down by an external force in the direction of arrow 51, the main liner 304 is pushed against the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium 2 via the liner support portion 305. As the recording medium 2 rotates or runs in the direction of arrow 51,
Foreign matter such as dust and dirt on the magnetic recording layer 3 is removed by the liner 304 made of a non-woven fabric or the like. Therefore, when magnetic recording / reproducing or magnetic field modulation of magneto-optical recording is performed by the recording head 8 in the head hole 301 portion of FIG. 46, the effect that the error rate is greatly reduced can be obtained. The material of the liner is the same as that of the conventional floppy liner, and for example, non-woven fabric is used. In this case arrow 51
In the case of the rotation direction indicated by a, the liner pin 310 is formed on the portion of the magnetic recording layer 3 in front of the magnetic head 8 as shown in FIG.
As a result, the cleaning effect is enhanced. In this case, even if the liner control system of the present invention is used for the contact type magneto-optical recording disk cassette 42 in which the ordinary magnetic recording layer 3 is not provided, dust is reduced and the error rate during magneto-optical recording is improved. The effect is obtained.

The control of the liner pin 310 is shown in FIG. 53, for example.
As shown in (b), the magnetic head 3 and the liner pin 310.
When the magnetic head 3 comes into contact, the liner 304 always comes into contact with the recording medium 2 so that the actuator can also be used. If the magnetic head 3 is not in contact, the liner pin 310 may be used as necessary.
To prevent the liner 304 from touching. When the liner pin 310 and the magnetic head 8 are interlocked as shown in the elevation views of the magnetic head in FIGS. 53A and 53B, the cassette 42 makes contact only when the magnetic recording layer has an identification hole, and when not present, the liner 304. And the recording medium 2 will not come into contact with each other.
This prevents the surface of the magnetic recording layer 3 from being worn by the liner 304 when unnecessary. At the same time, since the frictional force is reduced, the rotation torque of the motor is small and the power consumption is reduced. Even when the recording medium 2 having no magnetic recording layer is inserted, the magnetic head 8 does not contact the recording medium 2 as shown in FIG. Even if the disk cassette 42 of the present invention is mounted on a conventional recording apparatus that does not support the magnetic recording method of the present invention, the conventional apparatus is used as shown in the magnetic head elevation diagrams of FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). Liner pin 31
Since the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 do not come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 54 (b) because they do not have 0 and the raising / lowering function, they can be stably rotated even by a conventional magneto-optical recording / reproducing apparatus having a small drive torque of the disk. Therefore, there is an effect that the compatibility between the medium and the conventional device is maintained. Even if the conventional disc cassette 42 without the liner 304 or the liner hole 303 is mounted on the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention, FIG.
The liner pin 310 is not inserted because there is no liner hole 303 as shown in the magnetic head elevation views of FIGS. Therefore, the liner pin 310 does not contact the recording medium 2 or the liner 304. Therefore, inserting the conventional media into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention does not eliminate the problem at all,
There is an effect that compatibility between these is maintained. In this case, the lubricant of the conventional recording medium is the magnetic head 8.
Adheres to the contact surface and the error rate deteriorates. In order to prevent this, a cleaning track 67x is set as shown in the top view of the recording medium of the present invention in FIG. When the recording medium 2 of the present invention is loaded into the recording / reproducing apparatus of the present invention and the recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted after being detached, the insertion magnetic head 8 is first run over the cleaning track 67x at least once. . As a result, the above-mentioned dust is cleaned by the cleaning truck 67.
Adhere on x. The dust is further in contact with the recording medium 2. Removed by liner 304. As a result, dust on the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is finally removed, and there is an effect that reliable recording and reproduction with a low error rate can be performed. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are cross-sectional views of the liner elevating part showing the liner pin in the OFF state and the liner pin in the ON state. 58. FIG. 58 is a sectional view of the liner lifting / lowering portion viewed from the running direction of the recording medium 2 in FIGS. 51 and 52, respectively.

Next, an embodiment using a leaf spring type liner pin 310 will be described. The cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of FIGS. 60 and 61, the front cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of FIGS. 62 and 63 are full cross-sectional views of the liner pin portion of the leaf spring, and the liner pin 310 of the leaf spring is used. The OFF state and the ON state are shown respectively. In this case, the liner pin 310 is the pin driving lever 31.
It is driven in the directions of arrows 51 and 51a by the lifting motor 21 via 2 and turned on and off. The front sectional views of the liner pin shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 respectively show an OFF state and an ON state when the liner pin 310 is used when the rectangular one-hole liner hole 303 shown in FIG. 46A is used. In this case, there is an effect that the contact area of the liner pin with the liner mounting portion is increased and dust can be reliably removed.

In the front sectional views of the liner pin shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the liner guide 311 is provided with the protective portion 311a. Further, as shown in FIG. 66, the disc cassette 42 of the present invention
Also, a recognition hole 313 is provided. Therefore, when the disc cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted as shown in the figure, the liner pin 310 is inserted into the liner hole 303. However, the conventional disc cassette 42 without the recognition hole 313
67, the protective film 314 hits the case of the disc cassette 42 as shown in FIG.
Does not contact the case of the disc cassette 42. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the liner pin 310 from being soiled or damaged.

(Embodiment 8) Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The eighth embodiment discloses a method of pushing up the liner pin from the lower surface direction of the disc cassette to raise and lower the liner.

As shown in the top perspective view of the disc cassette of FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), there is no liner hole on the upper face. A liner hole 303 is provided adjacent to the recognition holes 313a, 313b, 313c on the back side, and a liner pin is inserted into the liner hole 303 from the back side of the drawing to raise and lower the liner.
69 (a) and 69 (b) are liner elevating parts A- in FIG. 68.
A sectional view of the A ′ plane is shown. First, when the liner pin 310 is in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the liner pin 304 and the recording medium 2 do not come into contact with each other. FIG. 69 (b)
When the liner pin 310 is inserted into the recognition hole 313 as shown in FIG.
16 is pushed rightward in the figure by the liner pin 310 and rotates counterclockwise about the pin shaft 315. Accordingly, the liner driving unit 316 causes the liner supporting unit 30 to
5 is pushed downward to bring the liner 304 and the recording medium 2 into contact with each other, and dust is removed as the line 5 rotates.

Next, the structure of the liner will be described. Figure 7
The structure of the liner is basically the same as the structure described with reference to FIG. 49, as shown in the configuration diagram of the liner 0 (a) (b) (c). However, the point that the movable portion 305a is provided at the tip of the driving portion of the liner driving portion 316 is different from the point that a liner driving groove 30a for accommodating the liner driving portion 316 is added as shown in FIG. 70 (c). .

Here, the structure of the liner pin 310 on the main body side will be described. The liner pin 310 and the motor 17 have a positional relationship as shown in the sectional view of the peripheral portion of FIG.
If the disc cassette 42 of the present invention is inserted in the direction of arrow 51, as shown in the sectional view of the peripheral portion of the liner pin of FIG. 72 (a), the liner 304 works together even if the actuator of the liner pin is not provided. Up and down. However, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the conventional disc cassette 42
When the disk is inserted, the liner pin 310 does not have the liner hole 303, so that the liner pin 310 is automatically lowered by the insertion by the spring 317, and there is an effect that the conventional disk cassette 42 is not damaged or adversely affected. in this case,
For example, in an application such as a game machine where the frequency of disk access is low, it is not necessary to provide an actuator on the liner pin, so that the structure is simplified. FIG. 73
As shown in the magnetic head elevating / lowering sections (a) and (b), one elevating motor 21 can be used to interlock the liner pin 310 by the elevating / lowering section 20 and the connecting section 318. When this structure is used, the liner 304 always comes into contact with the recording medium 2 when the magnetic head 8 comes into contact with the recording medium 2, so that the actuator can also serve as the liner 304. Fig. 74
The sectional views of the disc cassettes of (a) and (b) are basically the same as those of FIG. 69, but the liner driving unit 316 is extended and a pin shutter unit 319 is added, so that FIG.
As shown in (a), when the liner pin is turned off, the pin shutter 319 is closed, which has the effect of preventing external dust from flowing into the disc cassette 42. Since this structure uses the vicinity of the recognition hole of the disc cassette, it is only necessary to add one small hole to the conventional disc cassette. Therefore, there is an effect that the compatibility of the cassette structure becomes higher. Further, the structure of FIG. 69 has an effect that the required space in the horizontal direction is small. Therefore, for example, the liner hole 303a can be provided in a portion where there is almost no mounting space as in the BB ′ cross section of FIG. 68, and the degree of freedom in cassette design is improved.

(Embodiment 9) A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Example 9 shows an example in which the liner driving unit 316 has a sufficient mounting space. The top view of the disc cassette in FIG. 75 is the configuration viewed from the top of the ninth embodiment, and the configuration of the liner 305 and the liner mounting portion 305a is substantially the same as that in FIG. In this embodiment, the movable portion 305 of the liner mounting portion 305
A liner lifting portion 305c is provided at a. The liner driving unit 316 pushes this portion down in the figure to move the liner 305 up and down. This is A- of FIG.
This will be described with reference to the sectional views of the elevating part in FIGS. 76 and 77 which are sectional views of A ′. As shown in FIG. 76, when the liner pin 310 is OFF, the pin shutter 319 is pushed downward by the spring 307 so that dust does not enter from the outside.
The liner support portion 305 and the movable portion 305a are also pressed against the upper surface by the effect of the leaf spring and the sub liner support portion 305b. Therefore, the liner 304 is not in contact with the recording medium 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77, the liner pin 310 is used.
When ON, the liner driving unit 316 rotates clockwise around the pin shaft 316 by the pin shutter 319, and pushes down the liner elevating unit 305c. The recording medium 2 comes into contact with the foreign matter on the disk surface as the recording medium 2 rotates in the direction of arrow 51. Therefore, the effect of reducing the error rate can be obtained. Example 9
In this case, the structure is simple and the liner can be raised and lowered reliably. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a groove in the disc cassette 42a, the strength of the cassette is not impaired.

Further, B- in the top view of the cassette shown in FIG.
When attached to the B ′ sectional view, the structure is as shown in the sectional views of the liner pins of FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b). FIG. 76,
Since the operation is the same as the case of FIG. 77, detailed description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the liner pin 310 is off, the liner hole is closed by the pin shutter 319. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the liner pin 310 is on, the liner driving unit 315 rotates counterclockwise to lower the liner elevating unit 305C and push down the liner attaching unit 305a and the liner 304, so that the liner and the recording medium come into contact with each other. In this case, as compared with FIG. 76, there is an effect that the liner can be raised and lowered in a shorter space. When the liner pin 310 is inserted so that the contact between the liner and the recording medium is released, the liner comes into contact when not in use, and the frictional force prevents the recording medium from rotating, which has the effect of preventing damage to the recording medium. is there.

Example 10 Hereinafter, Example 10 of the present invention will be described.
The recording maximizing device will be described with reference to the drawings. The basic configuration is the same as the block diagram of FIG. First, the tracking method will be described in detail. As shown in the uncorrected tracking principle diagram of FIG. 79, in the ideal setting state, the magnetic head 8 on the upper surface and the optical head 6 on the lower surface have the same vertical positional relationship. Therefore, when the optical head accesses the optical track 65 of a specific optical address, the magnetic head 8 runs on the corresponding magnetic track 67 on the back surface. In this case, the DC of the tracking error signal of the optical head actuator 18
No offset voltage is generated. However, in reality, due to the product variation of the spring constant of the actuator and the application of gravity G due to the inclination of the apparatus, a deviation of ΔL, specifically, several tens to several hundreds of μm is generated between the center 321b of the optical actuator 18. . Further, the center 321C of the magnetic head 8 facing the center 321a of the optical actuator 18 also has a deviation due to an assembly error. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), a positional deviation occurs between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 which face each other.

The optical head 6 is provided with an optical track of a specific address.
Even if the track is restarted, there is no correspondence with the magnetic track tracked by the magnetic head 8, so that another magnetic track may be accessed. Specifically, the track pitch of the magnetic tracks is usually 50 to 200 μm.
The center of the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is several hundred μm at maximum. Therefore, under bad conditions, the magnetic head 8 may travel on the magnetic track adjacent to the target track, and incorrect data may be recorded.

In order to avoid this, according to the present invention, FIG.
As shown in (a), an offset voltage ΔV _o is applied to the tracking control signal so that the optical head 6 is decentered by ΔL so that the optical pickup 6 comes to the back side of the reference magnetic track 67z. That is, if the eccentricity correction amount ΔL is always eccentric, in the case of a stationary machine, the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 always face each other with high accuracy in the vertical direction, and the correlation between the optical track 65 and the magnetic track 67 increases, and The mechanical precision of is within a track deviation of several μm to several tens of μm.

In this way, even if the track pitch is 50 μm, the magnetic head can track to the target magnetic track based on the optical address.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), if this offset voltage ΔV _o is applied, the optical head 6 is eccentric by ΔL and the magnetic head 8 is accessed by accessing the address of the optical track 68. The desired magnetic track 67 will be accessed.

Here, a method of calculating the offset voltage ΔV _o will be described. First, as a measure against eccentricity, a method of obtaining the average track radius of the disk will be described. In the CD or mini disk (MD) standard, the eccentricity of the optical track 65 is maximum 200 μm. On the other hand, the track pitch of the magnetic track 67 is 2DD, that is, 2 in the 135TPI class.
It is 00 μm. Therefore, if no measures are taken, it is difficult to refer to the address of the optical track 65 to access the target backside magnetic track 67.

As shown in the disk eccentricity diagram of FIG. 81 (a), there is an eccentricity of Δr _n between the premastered optical track 65 _PM and the locus 65 _T when servo is not applied to the optical head 6. Occur.

Here, when the tracking servo is applied to the optical head without moving the traverse, it can be detected that the tracking error signal as shown in FIG. 81B is generated due to the eccentricity of the optical track.

[0098] When setting the optical track address at theta = 0 ° in the read reference point, the tracking radius by eccentricity r _n - △ r _n, and the radius r _n of the designed tracking
Draw a smaller radius. When θ = 180 °, on the contrary, r _n
It becomes + Δr _n , and draws a radius larger than r _n .

When the track pitch is 100 to 200 μm and the optical track has an eccentricity of ± 200 μm, the track radius itself changes unless track servo is applied.

As shown in the figure, the error is the smallest at θ = 90 ° and θ = 270 °. Therefore, θ = 90 °, 2
By determining the center position of the optical track with reference to the address of the optical track 65 _PM at 70 °, the radius r _n of the n-th track of the set value can be obtained.

As is clear from FIG. 81, θ = 90 ° and θ
= 270 °, Δr _n = 0, and standard track radius r
_n is obtained.

The positions of θ = 90 ° and 270 ° are shown in FIG.
It is obtained from the tracking error signal of (c).

By using the address of the optical track 65 at the position on the extension line of this angle, the optical head is made to track this optical address 65s, and the standard track radius r _n is obtained. The effect is that tracking becomes possible. The optical address 320 is recorded on the first track of the magnetic track 67 or the TOC track.

In the case of the CD and MD formats, the number of address information is small in one round of one optical track. Therefore, 360 addresses at all angles cannot be obtained at 360 °.

As shown in FIG. 86, it is possible to know what number block of address 1 corresponds to what number of angles θ. As a result, an angular resolution of, for example, 1 degree can be obtained.
Therefore, by managing this block unit, optical address information of an arbitrary radius on an arbitrary angle can be obtained. The correspondence table of the magnetic track numbers corresponding to the accurate optical address information will be referred to as "address correspondence table" hereinafter.

The method for obtaining an accurate optical track radius has been described above. Next, a method of associating the magnetic track radius r _m with the optical track radius r _o will be described.

As for the positional deviation between the optical head and the magnetic head, the deviation during operation is added to the deviation during manufacturing. These cannot be uniquely determined because there are variations among products. It is important to clarify this correspondence for compatibility.

There are two methods for this. The first method is a method in which no reference track is provided on the magnetic surface of the recording medium.

When the magnetic surface is formatted as shown in FIG. 79 (b), a positional deviation ΔL usually exists between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6. If formatting is performed in this state, a track shifted by ΔL is recorded. In this case, when recording / reproducing on the same disk and under the same drive under the same condition, there is no problem because everything is done in a state of ΔL shift.

In this case, since there is backlash of the traverse actuator, it is always necessary to move the traverse in the same direction when tracking to a predetermined track, for example, from the inner circumference to the outer circumference.

In order to track the nth track again, an offset distance of ΔL is provided between the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 as shown in FIG. 79 (b) without applying an offset voltage during tracking. Exists. Therefore,
When the same optical track as during recording is accessed, the same magnetic track as during recording is tracked, so that the data on the target magnetic track can be recorded and reproduced.

Next, when this formatted recording medium is applied to another drive, when the offset voltage is not applied, the drive has such a characteristic that ΔL = 0, for example, as shown in FIG. In this case, the optical track and the magnetic track are displaced from each other by an offset distance ΔL _o as compared with the time of recording,
Data is recorded / reproduced on the wrong magnetic track.
In order to avoid this, in the present invention, the traverse is controlled and moved so that the reference magnetic track 67 is accessed as shown in FIG.

Next, with the traverse fixed, the offset voltage ΔV is changed so that the optical head 6 accesses the optical track 65 containing the reference address signal, and ΔV _o is obtained. As a result, the correspondence relationship between the optical track and the magnetic track can be made similar to that of the previous drive that has performed the formatting.

82. By constantly applying this offset voltage ΔV _o to the actuator of the optical head 6, FIG.
As shown in (b), the effect that all other magnetic tracks and optical tracks correspond to each other with an accuracy of several μm to + several μm can be obtained with an inexpensive structure. In other words, if a specific optical address is accessed by applying an offset voltage, a specific magnetic address can be automatically accessed. This effect can be obtained with a configuration in which the optical head 6 is not provided with a lens position sensor, and therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

Next, the second method, that is, the method of recording the reference track on the magnetic recording surface in advance will be described. As shown in the diagram of the magnetic recording surface of FIG. 83, a magnetic track 67 on which a track for embedded servo is recorded when the disk is manufactured.
1 track is provided.

This servo magnetic track 67s is shown in FIG.
Of as shown in the left, A, B1 different frequencies f _a, f _b
Part of the two magnetic tracks on which the carrier is recorded are overlapped and recorded.

When the magnetic head 8 tracks this center and reproduces, the sizes of f _a and f _b are the same. However, if it shifts inward, the output of f _a becomes large, and if it shifts to the outside, the output of f _b becomes large. Therefore, the traverse can be moved to control the magnetic head 8 to the center of the track.

By providing this servo magnetic track, the cost of the medium is slightly increased, but FIG.
In, there is an effect that a more accurate value can be obtained when the offset voltage ΔV _o is calculated. Also, the eccentricity information of the optical track can be obtained more accurately.

As shown in the side views of the magnetic heads of FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the slider 41 of the magnetic head 8 is formed by molding a soft material such as Teflon instead of metal. This has the effect of reducing damage to the magnetic recording layer 3 by the slider 41.

Further, as shown in the side views of the magnetic heads of FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), when the magnetic recording is not performed, the slider is tilted by the slider actuator to separate the magnetic head 8 from the magnetic recording layer 3, and the slider 41 Touch a part of the edge.

Next, when the slider 41 is tilted to be parallel to the magnetic recording surface by the actuator only when magnetic recording is performed as shown in FIG. 85B, the magnetic head 8 contacts the magnetic recording layer 3 and magnetic recording is performed. It will be possible. In this case, there is an effect that abrasion of the magnetic head 8 is reduced when magnetic recording is not performed.

(Embodiment 11) Hereinafter, Embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described.
The recording / reproducing apparatus in will be described with reference to the drawings.

The basic configuration is shown in FIG. 38 described in the sixth embodiment.
Is the same as the block diagram of. The eleventh embodiment employs a method which is generally called a non-tracking method and which does not apply the tracking servo control of the magnetic head.

The block diagram at the time of recording has a structure like the block diagram of the recording circuit of FIG.

Two magnetic heads 8a having different azimuth angles as shown in the magnetic head diagrams of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b).
And the magnetic head 8b are recorded using the A head 8a and the B head 8b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the track pitch of the magnetic tracks 67 is T _P , the head width T
_H has a relationship of T _P <T _H <2T _P. Usually T _H = 1.
Used under the condition of 5 to 2.0 T _P. Therefore, when the nth track is recorded, it is also recorded in the area of the (n + 1) th track. At the time of recording the (n + 1) th track, this overlapping portion is overwritten for recording, so that the recording track is formed with a width of T _P.

As shown in the enlarged view of the recording format in FIG. 89, two heads having different azimuth angles, A head 8a and B head 8b, are switched at θ = 0 ° and recording is performed while spirally overwriting data alternately. Do it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88, a track width T _P smaller than the head width T _H is formed. A with different azimuth angles
Since the tracks 67a and the B tracks 67b are alternately adjacent to each other, crosstalk between tracks during reproduction does not occur. Further, as shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. 90, a guard band 325 is provided between a plurality of adjacent track groups 326.
Are provided, it is possible to record and reproduce independently of each other.

As shown in the data structure diagram of FIG. 91,
The data of each track such as A ₁ , B ₁ and A ₂ is composed of a plurality of blocks 327.
It is considered as one track group. A guard band 325 is provided between each track group to enable rewriting in track group units. A plurality of blocks constituting one track include a synchronization signal 328, an address 329, and a parity 33.
0, data 331, and error detection signal 332.

Here, the operation during recording will be described. The input data with the specified address is input to the input circuit 21. In the case of the eleventh embodiment, at the time of recording, the data is rewritten with the track group 326 of FIG. 91 as one unit. That is, a plurality of tracks are rewritten all at once. Since each track group 326 is separated by the guard band 325 as shown in FIG. 90, recording / reproducing in this unit does not affect other track groups.

When the input data includes only a part of the information of the track group, the data is insufficient, and the entire one track group 326 cannot be rewritten. Therefore, when the nth track group is rewritten, the nth track group is rewritten in advance.
The track group is reproduced and all the data is stored in the buffer memory 34 in the magnetic reproducing circuit 30. This data is sent to the input circuit 21 as an address and data at the time of writing,
Here, the data of the address matching the input data is replaced with the input data. In this case, the buffer memory 34
The same data as the address of the input data in may be replaced with the input data.

The n-th track group 32 to be written in this way
All the data of 6n are sent from the input circuit 21 to the magnetic recording circuit 29, modulated by the modulation circuit 334, and the separation circuit 333 creates the data for the A head 8a and the data for the B head 8b.

As shown in the recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (a), A track data 328a1 is recorded by the A head 8a at t = t ₁ , and the disc 360 is recorded.
The B track data 328b1 is recorded by the B head 8b at t = t ₂ rotated by °.

As the switching timing signal for the A head and the B head, the rotation signal of the disk motor 17 or the optical address information is detected by the optical reproducing circuit 38 to detect the rotation of 360 °, and the disk rotation angle detecting section 335 detects the magnetic recording circuit 2.
Sent to 9. A no-signal portion 337 is provided at the end of each track data 328, and a signal guard band is provided so that the A track data 328a and the B track data 328b do not overlap.

There is a guard band 325 on the disc, but it is necessary to set the recording start radius and the recording end radius accurately so as not to erroneously record on the adjacent track group 326 beyond this. The present invention uses a specific optical address as a reference point and uses a method of obtaining a permanent absolute radius.

In FIG. 87, the optical head 6 and the optical reproducing circuit 3
Read the optical address from 8. In this case, the optical head eccentricity correction method described with reference to FIGS. Calculate the eccentricity correction amount using the same method,
Stored in the eccentricity correction amount memory 336, read it when necessary,
With the optical head 6 being decentered by the optical head drive circuit 25, the traverse movement circuit 24a drives the traverse actuator 23a while referring to the optical address to move the traverse. Thus, the magnetic track 67 can be accurately tracked by referring to the optical address of the optical track.

Although an example of recording by alternately using the two magnetic heads 8a and 8b having different azimuth angles has been described, this method lengthens the recording time.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), the positions of the two heads in the radial direction are shifted by T _p , and the A track data and the B track data are simultaneously sent from the separation circuit 333 in FIG. The effect of being able to record one track group in half the time and speeding up as shown in the recording timing chart of FIG. 92 (b) by sending at a pitch twice T _p for each circumference. There is.

Thus, the input data is spirally recorded on the track. As a specific design example, even if the eccentricity of the optical track is ± 200 μm, the eccentricity correction means eliminates the influence and the eccentricity of chucking falls within ± 25 μm, for example. The eccentricity of the rotating shaft of the motor is
Within ± several μm. In this case, the width of the guard band is 50
When the track pitch is 10 μm or more, a track can be recorded with a width within an error of ± several μm by setting the track pitch to 10 μm or more.
Thus, there is an effect that a large capacity recording can be performed by the non-tracking method.

Traverse control for spiral recording will be described. In the recording format of FIG. 89,
Two points, a recording start optical address 320a and a recording end optical address 320e, are set as reference points. In the case of FIG. 89, the traverse may be driven at the same pitch from the start point to the end point while the disk makes four revolutions. In the case of the present invention, a configuration is adopted in which a screw is rotated by a rotary motor to feed a traverse. The rotation pulse from the rotary motor is obtained.

[0139] The traverse as the traverse gear rotation speed diagram in FIG. 97 is moved from the starting point optical address 320a to the optical address 320e of the end point, measure the rotational speed n _o of this period of the traverse drive gear. Since the disk is rotated four, the system controller 10 n _o / 4T r. p.
The rotation speed of s is calculated, and a command to rotate the traverse drive gear is issued at this rotation speed. Then, the magnetic head records data at an accurate track pitch. Moreover, since the magnetic head 8 is near the end optical address 320e at the end of recording, it does not pass through the guard band and reach the start optical address 320x of the adjacent track group. The traverse drive gear rotation speed may be measured once every time the disk is changed. It may also be recorded on a disc. or,
By performing the traverse control while counting the line number of the optical track, smoother and more accurate traverse feeding can be performed.

The cylindrical recording format diagram of FIG. 96 shows the case where a coaxial track is used. In this case, the optical address 320a, 320b, 32 of each track
The traverse is moved every time so that the optical head can access the six points 0c, 320d, 320e, and 320f in each track recording. As a result, a cylindrical track is formed.

Further, as shown in the optical recording surface format diagram of FIG. 98, the non-address area 3 having no optical address and no signal.
When 46 is present, access by optical address is not possible. In this case, the reference radius and the disc rotation reference angle are obtained in the optical address area 347, and the line number of the optical track is counted to obtain the non-optical address area 34.
Also in 6, the predetermined relative position can be tracked. Line No. from the reference light address point for each track
If the table is created and written in the magnetic TOC area 348, another drive can access the target magnetic track. The method of accessing by line No. has a lower absolute position accuracy than the optical address method, but has an effect of increasing the access speed. Both of them are preferably used in combination, but the line No counting method is often used during reproduction in terms of high-speed access. There are two types of drives, a high density type and a normal density type. High density type head width T _H is 1 / 2-1 / 3 of the normal type. The track pitch is 1/2 to 1/3 when the normal type is T _bo.
It becomes T _po . In the case of non-tracking, the high-density type can reproduce the normal-density type data, but the reverse is not possible.

In order to ensure compatibility, when recording in the high density type, a compatible track is provided, and recording is performed at a track pitch of T _po as shown in the recording format diagram of FIG. 99, so that the normal type can also be reproduced. As shown in the correspondence diagram between the optical recording surface and the magnetic recording surface of FIG. 100, when the data of the optical surface is divided into three programs 65a, 65b and 65c, each of the magnetic recording data to be saved,
Magnetic tracks 67a, 67b, 67 on the respective surface regions
Setting the area in c has the effect of reducing the traverse movement amount and shortening the access time.

Next, the principle of reproduction will be described. The block diagram at the time of reproduction in FIG. 93 shows blocks related to reproduction. 87 is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG.
Only different.

First, the system controller 10 sends a reproduction command and a magnetic track No access command to the traverse controller 3.
Sent to 38. Similarly to FIG. 87, the magnetic head accurately accesses the target magnetic track No.

As shown in FIG. 89, the magnetic track 67 is spirally tracked, and the A head 8a and the B head 8 are tracked.
Both outputs of b are simultaneously input to the magnetic reproducing unit 30, amplified by the head amplifiers 340a and 340b, demodulated by the demodulators 341a and 341b, and the error check unit 342.
a and 342b perform error checking, and send a normal signal only to normal data to the AND circuits 344a and 344b. The data separating unit separates the data into addresses and data, and the AND circuits 344a and 344b send only data having no error to the buffer memory 34, and store the respective data at predetermined addresses. This data is output from the memory 34 based on the read clock from the system controller 10. When the memory of the buffer memory 34 is about to overflow, an overflow signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 issues a command to the traverse control unit to reduce the traverse feed width. Alternatively, the speed of the motor 17 is slowed to lower the reproduction transfer rate. In this way overflow can be prevented.

When the error check unit 342 has many errors, an error signal is sent to the system control unit 10, and the system control unit 10 sends a track pitch reduction command to the traverse control circuit 24a. Thus, the track pitch of the playback is normal T _p from _{2 / 3T p, 1 / 2T} p, 1
/ 3T _p , and the data of the same address is 1.5 times, 2
Since it is reproduced twice or three times, the error rate decreases.
Further, if all the data of the next (n + 1) th track is collected before all the data of the nth track is collected in the buffer memory 34, there is a possibility that the data of the nth track cannot be reproduced. In this case, the system control unit 10 issues a reverse traverse command to the traverse control unit to return the traverse inward. Then, by reproducing the nth track, the data of the nth track can be reproduced.

Thus, there is an effect that the data can be surely reproduced without increasing the error rate.

Next, a non-tracking disc reproducing operation will be described. As shown in the data layout diagram of FIG. 94,
Recording data 345a, 345b, 345 of the A track
The data is recorded on the disc as shown by c and 345d. The data of B track, B ₁ , B ₂ , B ₃ , and B ₄ are also recorded, but cannot be reproduced when reproduced by the A head because the azimuth angle is different.

For ease of explanation, B track data is omitted. When the recording data 345 of the A track is reproduced by the A head 8a with the same track pitch T _{po as} that at the time of recording, the track of the track has a discrepancy between the disk and the chucking, and therefore the track tracks 349a, 349b, 349.
c, 349d. Head width T of A head 8a
_{Since H} is wider than T _po, it plays half tracks on both sides. Of course, B track is not reproduced.

Therefore, the data reproduced without error among the reproduced signals of the track trajectories is the A head reproduction data 3
It becomes like 50a, 350b, 350c, 350d, 350e.

This data is sequentially sent to the buffer memory 34 of FIG. 93 and recorded at a predetermined disc address,
The data of each track is completely reproduced like the memory data 351a and 351b.

In this way, the non-tracking A track data is reproduced. The B track is reproduced in the same manner.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since recording / reproducing can be performed with a small track pitch without applying the tracking servo of the magnetic head, a large capacity memory can be realized with a simple structure. In particular, since the traverse control is performed by using the address of the optical surface, the traverse feed accuracy may be low, and the linear sensor in the radial direction can be omitted. When applied to MDROM, several KB
~ Number + KB block unit, C without cartridge
When it is applied to a DROM, it has a disadvantage that it can be rewritten only in block units of several hundred B to several KB. However, when focusing on multimedia applications for home use, there is no problem because low cost and large capacity are more important than high-speed accessibility. In exchange for this disadvantage, in the case of the non-tracking servo system, there is an effect that the capacity can be dramatically increased by one digit to two digits or more. This large capacity can be realized at a low cost because the system does not require an expensive track servo. This is because in the case of the non-tracking method, basically, the tracking is accurately performed only by the accuracy of the bearing of the rotary motor. And this bearing precision is realized at low cost. In the case of the MD-ROM used in the cartridge, since the recording wavelength can be set to 1 μm or less, the recording capacity of about 2 to 5 MB can be obtained. Example 12 in the case of a CDROM used naked
Since a printing layer and a protective layer are provided on the magnetic layer as described later in 13, the recording wavelength becomes as long as 10 μm or more. For this reason, in the normal method, only a capacity of several + KB can be obtained. But,
Number + KB to 1MB due to adoption of no-tracking method
A recording capacity of some degree can be obtained. As described above, the eleventh embodiment has an effect that the optical access mechanism of the current CD, CDROM, MD, MDROM can be used as it is, and a large capacity can be achieved at low cost.

(Embodiment 12) A recording / reproducing apparatus according to Embodiment 12 of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

The basic structure is almost the same as the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the embodiment. The recording / reproducing apparatus of the twelfth embodiment uses a recording medium in which a magnetic recording layer is provided on the back surface of a ROM disk which does not use a cartridge like the CDROM described in the previous embodiment. Since the basic operation of the recording / reproducing apparatus has already been described, the description will be omitted and the recording medium will be described in detail.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the recording medium 2. The light transmission layer 5, the optical recording layer 4, the magnetic recording layer 3, and the printing layer 43 on the printing layer 43 are arranged from the bottom, and the print 45 such as a label such as a title of a CD is formed on the printing area 44. A hard protective layer 50 having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more may be provided. CD
In a recording medium such as a CDROM or a CDROM which does not have a cartridge and has an optical recording surface on one side, the printing area 44 can be provided on almost the entire one surface on the opposite side. LD and LD
In the case of having a double-sided optical recording surface such as a ROM, as shown in the perspective view of the recording medium in FIG. 102, the print area 44 can be provided in a narrower area in the central portion that does not affect the optical reproduction.

In this embodiment, the case where a CDROM is used as a recording medium will be described. Here, the configuration and manufacturing method of the recording medium will be described. In the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of FIG. Let P be P, and when P = 1, prepare a substrate 47 having the light transmitting portion 5 in which the pits 46 are engraved. When P = 2, the light reflecting film 48 of aluminum or the like is formed by vapor deposition, sputtering or the like. Hc is 150 at P = 3
High Hc of 1750 or 2750 Oe above 0 Oe
The magnetic recording layer 3 is prepared by directly applying a magnetic material such as barium ferrite having the above properties, or transferring the material once applied to the base film together with the adhesive layer. The recording medium of this embodiment is not protected by the cartridge. Therefore, it is necessary to use a high Hc magnetic material so that the recorded data is not destroyed by a strong external magnetic field such as a magnet. Hc is 1750O when magnetic media is used naked in industrial applications
It has been confirmed by a field test that data is not destroyed under normal use conditions by using a magnetic recording material of e to 2750 Oe. In domestic use, as can be seen from the magnetic field strength diagrams of various domestic products in FIG. 121, only 1000 to 1200 Gauss magnetic fields are usually present in the home. Therefore, H of the magnetic material of the magnetic recording layer 3 is
c may be set to 1200 Oe or more. In this embodiment, by using a material having Hc of 1200 Oe or more, data destruction in daily life is prevented. In order to improve the reliability during data recording, the reliability is further improved by using barium ferrite or the like and increasing the Hc of the magnetic material to 2500 or more. Barium ferrite is suitable for a CDROM type partial RAM disk in which low cost mass production is indispensable because barium ferrite is inexpensive and can be produced by an inexpensive coating process, and since random orientation is naturally performed, a randomizer process is unnecessary. In this case, it is processed on a disk. What is important is that since recording and reproduction are performed in the circumferential direction, recording characteristics are deteriorated when magnetically oriented in a specific direction like a magnetic card or magnetic tape. In order to prevent such orientation in a certain direction, a magnetic film is formed by applying an external magnetic field in various directions by a randomizer before the applied magnetic material is solidified. As described above, in the case of barium ferrite, the effect that the randomizing step can be omitted can be obtained. However, in case of CD and CDROM,
As shown in 01, the CD standard requires that the title and contents of the medium be printed and displayed as a label so that the consumer can visually recognize and discriminate the contents of the medium. It is also important to enhance the product value by printing photos in color and making the appearance beautiful. Since magnetic materials are usually dark brown or black tones,
You cannot print directly on this. When P = 4, the dark color of the magnetic recording layer 3 is erased, and in order to enable color printing, a printing base layer 43 of a color with many reflections such as white is formed by coating or the like to have a film thickness of several hundred nm to several μm. .. From the viewpoint of recording characteristics, it is preferable that the print underlayer be thin, but if it is too thin, the color of the magnetic recording layer below will be transmitted, so the film thickness d ₂ of the print underlayer 43 is required to have a certain thickness. . Since the thickness of more than half the wavelength is required for the light not to pass through, the thickness of λ / 2 = 0.2 μm or more is required for the shortest wavelength of visible light λ = 0.4 μm. Therefore, d ₂ is required to have a thickness of 0.2 μm or more. By using d ₂ ≧ 0.2 μm, the effect of shielding the color of the magnetic material as a base for printing can be omitted. On the other hand, when d ₂ > 10 μm, the magnetic recording characteristics are significantly deteriorated due to space loss, which is not preferable. Therefore, at least d ₂ ≦ 10 μm can be used for magnetic recording and reproduction. By setting 0.2 <d ₂ <10 μm, there is an effect that both the color cutoff characteristic and the magnetic recording characteristic can be made compatible. Experiments have revealed that it is desirable to use it at around 1 μm. When a magnetic recording material is mixed with the print base layer 43, there is an effect of substantially reducing space loss.

By applying the printing ink 49 made of dye at P = 5, the label print 45 as shown in FIG. 101 can be displayed. Since printing is performed on the white print base layer 43, full-color printing is possible. P in FIG.
= 5, the printing ink 49 of the dye is applied, so that the ink soaks into the printing base layer 43 at a depth of d ₃ , and no unevenness is generated on the surface of the printing base layer 43. As a result, the head touch of the magnetic head is improved during magnetic recording / reproduction, and the dropout of printing due to running of the magnetic head is prevented. Thus, the recording medium is completed.

As the manufacturing method, the magnetic recording layer 3 with P = 3,
The printing ink 49 of P = 5 and P = 5 is manufactured using a gravure coating process as shown in the overall perspective view of the coating process of FIG. To explain this, the coating material of the barium ferrite magnetic material transferred from the coating material pot 352 to the coating material transfer roll 353 is selectively etched and remains in the CD-shaped etching portion 355 on the intaglio drum. The unnecessary coating material is removed by the scriber 356. CD
The coating material in the shape of is a CD-shaped coating portion 358 on the soft transfer roll 367 covered with the soft resin portion 361.
Is transcribed as. The coating section 358 is transferred and coated on the surface of the recording medium 2 such as a CD. Before being dried, a magnetic field is applied by the random magnetic field generator 362, and a random magnetization orientation is obtained. Since the soft transfer roll 367 is soft, it can be accurately applied to a hard object such as a CD. In this way, P = 3, P = 4, and P = 6 application of FIG. 103 can be performed. However, the printing process of P = 5 may be an offset printing process because the film thickness is thin. Further, as shown by P = 6 in FIG. 103, by applying a protective layer 50 made of a hard transparent material having a thickness d4 of Mohs hardness of 5 or more on the recording medium, it is possible to prevent the falling of the printing ink and to prevent external scratches. Since the magnetic recording layer 3 can be protected from abrasion by the magnetic head, the reliability of data is improved.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the coating and transfer process of FIG. 106, a protective layer is formed on the release film 359 by the process of P = 6, 5, 4, 3 in the reverse order of the process described in FIG. 50, printing ink 49, printing base layer 43, and magnetic recording layer 3 are applied, and random orientation is performed by a random magnetic field generator 362. The coating film is aligned with the surface of the substrate 4 on the pit 46 side, and after transfer, it is fixed by thermocompression bonding and the release film 359 is removed, thereby completing the recording medium having the same structure as the process P = 6 in FIG. To do. In the case of mass production, the transfer method has a higher throughput and a lower cost. Therefore, when producing tens of thousands of CDs, the production efficiency is improved. Therefore, it is suitable.

Although the dye is used in the printing of FIG. 103, the pigment printing ink 49 may be used as in step P = 5 of the coating process diagram of FIG. 104. In this case, the thickness is d3, but by providing the protective layer 50 made of a transparent material containing a lubricant satisfying d4> d3 at P = 6, the effect of reducing unevenness on the surface and improving the head touch by the lubricant is provided. is there. The use of pigments has the effect of enabling wider color printing. In this case, after the step of P = 5, hot pressing may be applied to eliminate surface irregularities and the product may be used as it is as a finished product. In this case, since the protective layer 50 can be omitted, there is an effect that one step can be reduced.

Next, a method of forming the magnetic shield layer will be described. Since the magnetic head is on the side of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the recording medium and the optical head is on the side of the light transmission layer, electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head leaks directly to the magnetic head, and the error rate during reproduction of the magnetic signal is increased. Deteriorates. As shown in the diagram of the relative noise amount from the optical pickup to the magnetic head in FIG. 116, noise of nearly 50 dB is generated. By providing a magnetic shield in the recording medium 2 as a countermeasure, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced. As shown in the manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of FIG. 107, when P = 2, the magnetic shield effect is obtained by providing the high μ magnetic layer 69 such as permalloy having a high μ and a small Hc by a spat or the like. When it is desired to form the low Hc magnetic layer 69 in a short time or to make it thick in the manufacturing process, a permalloy foil having a thickness of several to several tens of μm may be inserted. It can be made thick even by the plating method. By making it thick, the magnetic shield effect becomes higher. Further, in FIG. 103, the light reflection layer 48 is made of aluminum at P = 2, but light reflection and the magnetic shield can be shared by one film by forming permalloy by sputtering. If you want to thicken permalloy, you can make it at low cost by plating method. This has the remarkable effect of halving the number of steps for the reflection shield film. In addition, in the process of the transfer method, FIG.
In addition to the step shown in FIG. 106, a recording medium having a magnetic shield effect can be obtained by sandwiching the adhesive layer 60a and the high μ magnetic layer 69 such as permalloy foil of several μm to several tens of μm. It can be created in the transfer process.

As described above, the recording medium having the magnetic recording layer and the optical recording layer having the printing surface as shown in FIG. 101 can be prepared. Therefore, it is possible to provide the same label as that of the conventional CD that meets the standard of the CD, and at the same time, the magnetic recording surface can be added. Now, as described above in the magnetic field strength diagram of domestic products in FIG. 121, the magnets existing in daily life are mainly ferrite magnets which are inexpensive. And most of the magnets are not directly exposed. A magnetic field of about 1000 Oe is generated even in the exposed area and the vicinity thereof. Rare earth magnets, such as magnetic necklaces, are rarely used in daily life, but because of their small size, they are unlikely to magnetize barium ferrite magnetic recording materials. Therefore, by using a magnetic recording material having Hc of 1200 Oe such as barium ferrite and 1500 Oe or more with a margin, it is possible to prevent data destruction of the magnetic recording layer by a magnet existing in daily life. Furthermore, since a magnetic shield layer made of a high μ magnetic material can be added, electromagnetic noise from the optical head during magnetic reproduction can be greatly reduced. The above manufacturing method basically uses an inexpensive construction method such as a gravure coating process and an inexpensive material, and thus has a low cost. There is a remarkable effect of being obtained.

Example 13 Hereinafter, Example 13 of the present invention will be described.
The recording / reproducing apparatus in will be described with reference to the drawings. The basic configuration is similar to the block diagram of FIG. 87 described in the eleventh embodiment. The major difference is that a magnetic material having a higher Hc than that of an ordinary magnetic disk is used as described in Embodiment 12, and a nonmagnetic protective layer having a thickness of 1 μm is formed on the upper layer of the magnetic recording layer.
Since a recording medium having a length of m or more is used, a magnetic head suitable for this recording medium is used and measures are taken to prevent mixed noise due to a magnetic field from the optical head.

First, the structure of the magnetic head will be described. In the overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 110, the magnetic head of the block diagram of FIG. 87 is divided into two, the write magnetic head 8a and the read magnetic head 8b are integrated, and noise canceling Magnetic head 8s
3 heads are used. Since it is possible to reproduce while recording, error checking can be performed at the same time. Since other operations are the same as those in FIG. 87, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The two heads of the magnetic heads 8a and 8b, which are the characteristics of this embodiment, will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion of FIG.

The optical head 6 and the magnetic heads 8a and 8b are arranged on both sides of the recording medium 2 so as to face each other, and the optical head 6 accesses a desired specific track of the optical recording layer 4 on the recording medium 2. As a result, the magnetic heads 8a and 8b that move together with the optical head 6 travel on the magnetic tracks on the back side of the optical tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3, and the magnetic recording is performed by the write magnetic head 8a. Is performed by the magnetic head 8b. This recording / reproducing state will be described with reference to the magnetic track of FIG. Since the magnetic head 8a has a head gap 70a having a track width La for writing and a gap length Lgap, a magnetic track 67a having a width of La is recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3. On the magnetic track accessed by the magnetic head 8, there is a disk-shaped disk cleaning section 376 made of a soft material such as felt.
It has the effect of removing dust and dirt on the disc and reducing the error rate during playback. In the OFF state of FIG. 111, neither the magnetic head 8 nor the disk cleaning part 376 connected to the disk cleaning part connection part 380 by the spring is in contact with the recording medium 2. Next, when the magnetic head 8 is lowered,
First, the disk cleaning unit 376 lands on the recording medium 2 as in N-A. The magnetic head portion 8 does not come into contact with the recording medium 2 due to the disk cleaning portion connecting portion 380 including a spring. Therefore, in the ON-B state, the magnetic head 8 soft-landes in two steps of the recording medium 2. Therefore, even if the magnetic head 8 is raised and lowered while the recording medium 2 is rotating, both the magnetic head 8 and the recording medium 2 are exposed. This has the effect of preventing damage. Further, as shown in the top view of FIG. 113, since the magnetic track 67a before the traveling of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned, the effect that the error rate at the time of magnetic recording / reproduction is reduced can be obtained.
A magnetic head cleaning unit 377 interlocking with the magnetic head elevating / lowering unit 21 is also provided, and the magnetic head cleaning unit 377 cleans the contact portion of the magnetic head 8 at least once when the magnetic head 8 moves up and down when a disk is mounted. To be done. At this time, the disc of the disc cleaning unit 376 rotates a slight angle and becomes a new face, so that the disc is cleaned by the new face when the next disc is mounted. Next, since the reproducing head gap 70b of the magnetic head 8a has a width of Lb only, only the width of the reproducing track 67b of the magnetic track 67a is reproduced. In the case of the thirteenth embodiment, the head gap length Lgap of the magnetic head 8a is important. This is because the recording medium described in the twelfth embodiment has the print base layer 43 and the print layer 49 protective layer 50 between the magnetic recording layer 3 and the magnetic heads 8a8b, as described in FIG. The thickness is d2, d3, d4
Is. Therefore, a space loss of at least d = d2 + d3 + d4 always occurs. The space loss S is given by S = 54.6 (d / λ) (dB) (1) when the recording wavelength is λ.

The relationship between the head gap Lgap and λ is expressed by λ = 3 × Lgap .................................... (2).

As a result of an experiment, it is preferable that the print base layer 43 has a thickness of 1 μm or more from the viewpoint of light shielding property. In addition, the printing layer 49
The protective layer 50 needs to have a total thickness of 1 μm. Therefore d
Is 2 μm, and d ≧ 2 μm ………………………………………… (3) From the above three conditional expressions, S = 54.6 × 2 / 3Lgap (dB) ... (4)

This can be represented by the relationship diagram between the head gap and the space loss in FIG. If the space loss alone is not suppressed to at least 10 dB or less, sufficient recording / reproducing voltage characteristics cannot be obtained, and the predetermined reliability cannot be secured. Therefore, from the graph of FIG. 112, it is understood that LGap needs to be set to at least 5 μm or more for a CD-ROM for a computer, which places importance on reliability, and for an application using a recording medium with a printing layer. But for game C
Since reliability is not so required in D-ROM applications, optimum reliability and slightly high recording density can be obtained by using a magnetic head having a head gap of 3 μm or more. With a head gap of 200 μm or more, the recording density becomes 100 BPI or less, and the capacity for a magnetic disk decreases significantly.
Only 00 Bytes can be obtained and it does not meet the demand for game use. Therefore, in consideration of consumer applications, when a printing layer is provided,
When the head gap is in the range of 3 μm to 200 μ, the effect that optimum reliability and optimum capacity are obtained can be obtained. In addition, in a business use where higher density is prioritized than beauty of printing, a recording medium without a printing layer can reduce space loss and further increase the capacity. However, in the case of the hybrid medium of the present invention, it is premised that it is used naked like a CD. Therefore, space loss due to dust cannot be avoided. Space loss due to oil such as fingers and household waste is the worst d = 1 μm ……………………………………………… (5) It is necessary to consider the equation. The attenuation in this case is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, when a medium having no print layer is used, by setting the head gap to be 1.5 μm or more, there is an effect that recording / reproduction can be performed with a higher storage capacity without being affected by space loss. If there is no print layer, it may be set in the range of 1.5 μm to 200 μm. A magnetic head of a recording / reproducing apparatus for recording / reproducing by rotating a magnetic disk for recording data such as a hard disk or a floppy has a slider portion and a head gap is usually 0.5 μm or less. When the recording medium of the present invention is recorded / reproduced using such a conventional magnetic head for a magnetic disk, sufficient recording / reproduction output cannot be obtained due to the presence of the protective layer or the printing layer. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in the magnetic head portion 8a of FIG. 111, the slider portion 41 is provided and at least the head gap of the recording head 8a is set to 5 mm.
Since it is not less than μm, the space loss is 10 dB or less as shown in the graph of FIG. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient recording / reproducing output can be obtained at the time of recording / reproducing.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a full-color label can be printed on the surface of the medium, and the conventional CD and CDR can be printed as shown in FIG.
It is possible to use a recording medium having the same appearance as the OM. Therefore,
Even if the CD having the magnetic recording layer of the present invention is adopted, the difference in appearance does not cause confusion to consumers, and the basic functions of the CD standard are not impaired. In particular, since barium ferrite, which has a high Hc and a low material cost and does not require a random orientation process, is used for the magnetic recording layer, magnetic data is not destroyed even under the worst conditions in daily life and magnetic fields can be manufactured at low cost. .. As described above, since the CD can be handled in exactly the same manner as the existing CD, there is an effect that it is completely compatible with the CD.

Next, a measure for suppressing magnetic field noise from the optical head to the magnetic head will be described. Electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator 18 causes noise to be mixed into the reproducing magnetic head 8b, resulting in a poor error rate.

Therefore, as a first method, by using the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 described in the twelfth embodiment as shown in the transverse sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of FIG. It is possible to prevent the error rate from deteriorating due to the mixing of noise into the magnetic head 8. In this case, when the optical head comes to the end of the disk, since there is no magnetic shield outside the disk, electromagnetic noise from the optical head actuator reaches the magnetic head 8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, a magnetic shield 360 is provided in the peripheral portion of the disk on the recording / reproducing apparatus side to block electromagnetic noise outside the disk. As another method, as shown in FIG. 111, the actuator 18 of the optical head is connected to a magnetic shield 3 having a high μ such as permalloy or iron.
A lens opening 362 is surrounded by 60. As a result, the effect that the electromagnetic noise generated by the actuator of the optical head is less mixed into the magnetic head 8b, and the mixed electromagnetic noise is significantly reduced.

The relationship between the distance between the magnetic head and the optical head and the mixed noise in FIG. 116 is the magnetic head in a state where the optical head portion of the recording / reproducing apparatus actually manufactured is fixed and the focus control to the optical recording portion is performed. The relative level of electromagnetic noise mixed from the optical head 6 to the magnetic head 8 is measured by moving the position of the part on a plane facing the recording medium. The second method is to detect this noise and add it to the playback signal in anti-phase,
The method is to reduce the noise component. As shown in the block diagram of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus of FIG. 111, a noise canceling magnetic head 8s and a noise detecting unit such as a magnetic sensor are provided, and in the noise canceller unit 378, a constant addition is made in the opposite phase to the reproducing signal of the magnetic head 8b. By adding with the ratio A, the noise component is canceled. Noise can be canceled by optimizing the addition ratio A. The optimum addition ratio A ₀ can be obtained by running a magnetic track having no magnetic recording signal and changing the addition ratio so that the reproduction signal is minimized. You can calibrate A ₀ ^`in that way. This calibration work is performed when the mixed noise becomes large. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by using the recording head 8a as a mixed noise detection unit by utilizing the fact that the recording head 8a is not used during reproduction in FIG. 110 and inputting the signal of the recording head 8a to the noise canceller 378. . In this case, there is an effect that the canceling magnetic head 8s can be omitted.

The configuration when the noise canceling magnetic head 8s is provided will be described. As shown in the configuration diagram of the noise canceling magnetic head of FIG. 129, as shown in the side view of FIG. 129 (a), the noise canceling magnetic head 8
It is attached to the magnetic heads 8a and 8b via the coupling portion 8t. FIG. 129 (c) shows a view from above.
FIG. 129 (b) shows a side view as seen from the direction of travel of the truck. When the recording medium 2 is contacted, a do space loss in height occurs. From equation (1) of this embodiment, λ = 200 μm
In this case, if do is 200 μm or more, the reproduction signal from the magnetic recording layer becomes −60 dB and reproduction is hardly possible. On the other hand, as shown in the diagram of the mixed noise in FIG. 116, the level of the mixed noise is − even if the magnetic head is moved upward by 0.2 mm.
Almost no decrease within 1 dB. In this case, if the distance Ls between the noise canceling magnetic head 8s and the reproducing magnetic head 8b is λ = 200 μm, then λ / 5, that is, 40.
By leaving more than μm, it is possible to prevent the original signal from being mixed from the reproducing head. Therefore, there is a great effect that it is possible to almost completely suppress the electromagnetic noise mixed from the optical head drive section to the reproducing magnetic head. Also, the canceling magnetic head 8s
Instead, as shown in the configuration diagram of the magnetic sensor of FIG. 130, a magnetic sensor 381 such as a Hall element or an MR element is provided on the slider 41 near the magnetic head 8 to detect the drive magnetic noise of the optical head 6. be able to. By adding this signal to the magnetic reproduction signal in opposite phase, the mixed noise can be greatly reduced. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced as compared with the magnetic head detection method.

172 to 175 show a more specific structure of FIG. 129, and FIG. 172 (a) shows an example in which a head having a structure in which the recording head 8a and the reproducing head 8b are combined with one gap is used. Shows.

When heads of exactly the same size are arranged as shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), the effect is the highest although the size becomes large.

FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b) show an example in which the width of the canceling head 8s is narrowed and downsized. In this case, the size can be reduced.

FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show an example using a canceling magnetic head 8s having a uniform width. Especially FIG. 172
In (c), the slider 41 is provided with a groove 41a which also serves as the above groove having a gap of d ₀ . The air contact surface of the slider 41 is secret from the head 8a, and the air pressure of the magnetic head 8a is smaller. Therefore, there is an effect that the contact between the head and the medium is improved. In this case l ₂ > l ₁
And

FIG. 173 eliminates the head gap of the cancel head 8s of FIG. 171. Since magnetic signals are not read even when the cancel head 8s is brought into contact with the magnetic surface, only noise can be picked up.

176 to 178 use a coil 499 as a canceling head.

FIG. 176 (a) shows two coils 499a and 499b arranged in the groove of the magnetic head 8. FIG. 17
The magnetic flux 85 of noise such as 5 (b) can be detected.

In FIG. 177 (a), coils 99a and 499b are arranged in parallel with the gap of the head, and the effect is high because noise in the magnetic field direction of the head can be detected.

FIG. 177 (b) shows a block diagram of noise cancellation, in which the signals of 499a and 499b are amplified by amplifiers 500a and 500c, respectively, mixed by amplifier 500b, and added to the noise input section of noise canceller 378 of FIG. input.

FIG. 178 (a) shows coils 499a and 499b parallel to the head cap and 499c and 499d perpendicular to the coils.
The four coils of are used to enhance the noise detection capability.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 178 (b), the outputs of the parallel coils 499a and 499b and the vertical coil 49 are shown.
By adjusting and mixing the outputs of 9c and 499d,
A noise detection signal most suitable for cancellation can be obtained.

The spectrum distribution chart of FIG. 179 shows the result of actually measuring the electromagnetic noise of the optical pickup with the noise cancel head attached. As is clear from the figure, the noise generated at several KHz overlaps with the reproduction frequency region of the present invention using a wavelength of 100 microns, which makes reproduction difficult. However, it is shown in the figure that the adoption of the cancel head reduces the noise of about 35 dB in this region. Therefore, there is an effect that the error rate at the time of reproduction is greatly improved.

As apparent from FIG. 116, as the third method, when a space of 10 mm is provided, noise of 15 dB is reduced. Therefore, the distance between the optical head and the magnetic head is 10 mm.
By taking the above, there is an effect that noise is significantly reduced. When separated as described above, it is important to maintain the accuracy of the positional relationship between the optical head and the magnetic head. A configuration that specifically realizes this will be described.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in FIG. 117, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are rotated by the same traverse actuator 23 so that the traverse gear 3 is rotated.
The traverse shafts 363a and 363b rotate in the same direction by 67a, 367b, and 367c. These have opposite threads to each other, so the optical head 6 has an arrow 51a.
As shown by, the magnetic head 8 moves to the left in the drawing by the arrow 5
In the direction of 1b, they move in the opposite directions to the right.
Then, each head first detects the position reference points 364a and 36a.
As a result of hitting the position 4b, the position is adjusted, the optical head 6 moves above the reference optical track 65a, and the magnetic head 8 moves above the reference magnetic track 67a. Since the initial setting of the positions of both is performed in this way, the accuracy of the positional relationship between the two during movement is maintained. By performing this positioning at least once when a new recording medium 2 is mounted or when the power is turned on, the two simply move by the same distance. Therefore, when the optical head 8 accesses the specific optical track 65, the magnetic head 6 accurately accesses the specific magnetic track 67 on the same radius as the optical track 65. After that, when the optical head 6 is moved, the magnetic head 8 is also moved by the same amount, and therefore, as shown in the top view of the traverse in FIG. To access. In the case of the outermost circumference, both heads are located on the track on the circumference of radius L ₂ . In the case of the innermost circumference, both heads move on the track on the circumference of radius L ₁ . In this case, the distance between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is 2L ₁ , but this distance is 10
When it is equal to or larger than mm, the noise mixed from the optical head to the magnetic head becomes small. In the case of a CD, since L ₁ = 23 mm, the distance between the two is 2L ₁ = 46 mm, and as is clear from FIG. 116, the mixed noise is 10 dB or less, and there is a great effect that there is almost no effect. As shown in FIG. 117, when the recording medium 2 is mounted, it cannot be mounted as it is because of the magnetic head 8. Therefore, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are largely lifted by the elevating portion 21 of the magnetic head shown in FIG. 1 to mount the recording medium. at the time,
The positional relationship between the two heads described above goes wrong. At this time, as described above, the contact surface of the magnetic head 8 is cleaned by the magnetic head cleaning unit 377. Then, the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are returned to predetermined positions. At the time when the magnetic head 8 and the traverse portion are returned to their original positions, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8
The exact relative positional relationship with Therefore, even if the magnetic head 8 is moved in conjunction with the optical head 6 as it is, the specific magnetic track 67 on the same radius as the optical track 65 is moved.
Can not be accessed accurately. By performing the positioning operation described above at least once when the recording medium is mounted, there is a great effect that the positional accuracy when the magnetic head 67 accesses the desired magnetic track 67 is increased with a simple configuration. It can be said that this is an important function for realizing consumer equipment that requires low cost.

As another configuration, as shown in the transverse sectional view of another traverse portion in FIG. 120, a flexible traverse connecting portion 366 such as a leaf spring and a connecting portion guide 37 for guiding it.
By connecting the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 by means of 5, it is possible to move them in an interlocking manner as shown by an arrow 51, and the effect of moving both heads in an interlocking manner can be obtained as in the traverse section described in FIG. 117. In this system, since the traverse connecting portion 366 is soft, the magnetic head 8 is moved to the arrow 5
It can be easily raised in the direction of 1a. Therefore, the effect of facilitating the lifting of the magnetic head 8 by the magnetic head elevating / lowering portion when the recording medium 2 is mounted is added.

117 may be arranged as shown in the transverse cross-sectional view of the traverse of FIG. 126 so that the distance between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 is always L ₀ . In this case, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 move in the same direction as indicated by arrows 51a and 51b. In this case, the magnetic head 8
Since the distance between the optical head 6 and the optical head 6 can be set to be the largest, the mixed noise of the magnetic head from the optical head is reduced.
In the case of a CD, there is no great effect, but as in the case of an MD disk, the radius is small and the method described in FIG.

In the description of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the magnetic head and the optical head are set to 1 with respect to the center of the disk.
It was explained using the figure when it is arranged at an angle of 80 °.
The arrangement may be 60 °, 90 °, or 120 °. In this case, if both the heads are closest to each other and the distance between them is 10 mm or more, the mixed noise can be reduced.

Noise is reduced by combining one or more of the above three measures against mixed noise.

When the electromagnetic shield of the optical head 6 is sufficiently effective, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 can be made to face each other in the vertical direction as shown in the transverse sectional view of the traverse portion in FIG. In this case also, the position reference parts 364a, 36
The provision of 4b has the effect of increasing the accuracy of alignment of both heads. This face-to-face arrangement method has the effect of downsizing because all components can be arranged on one side of the center of the disc.

Next, the recording format will be described. Since the data optical disc is CAV (constant rotation speed), the rotation speed is the same even if the radius of the optical head changes. However, when it is applied to a CDROM, the rotation of the disk becomes CLV, and the linear velocity is constant although the rotational speed varies depending on the radius of the track. In this case, recording formats such as general floppy disks and hard disks cannot be used. In the present invention, in order to increase the recording capacity when applied to the CDROM, the recording formats 370a, 370b, 370c, 370 in the recording format diagram of FIG.
As indicated by d, 370e, the data capacity of each track is set larger toward the outer circumference. A sync part 369, a track number part 371, a data part 372 having a different capacity for each track, a CRC part 373 for error check at the end are provided at the beginning of the data, and a no-signal gap part 374 is set after that. Even if the linear velocities are different from each other, the synchronizing section 369b and the like at the next head portion are prevented from being accidentally erased at the time of recording. With a CD like this, rather than having the same capacity for each track like a floppy,
This has the effect of increasing the recording capacity by about 1.5 times. Also,
Since the magnetic head performs magnetic recording and reproduction by using the rotation control of the CLV motor based on the signal of the optical head of the CD as it is, there is an effect that a motor control circuit dedicated to magnetic recording can be omitted.

Next, the physical format on the disc will be described. There are two types of physical formats: "normal mode" and "variable track pitch mode".
As shown in the physical format diagram in the normal mode on the recording medium of FIG. 123, the optical tracks 65a, 65b, 6
The magnetic tracks 67a and 67 are provided on the back surfaces of the 5c and 65d, respectively.
b, 67c, 67d are arranged, and in the normal mode, the tracks are arranged at an evenly spaced track pitch Tpo.

Further, in the present invention, the "variable angle" system is adopted. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 119, in the case of the present invention, there are various relative angles between the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 such as 0 °, 180 °, 45 ° and 90 °. Normally, in the conventional rotary magnetic disk type recording / reproducing apparatus, the data synchronizing section 369, that is, the Index 45.
Reference numeral 5 is arranged at a position on a fixed angle with respect to the center of the disk. However, in the variable angle type Index of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 123, the angle of the arrangement of the synchronization unit 369 at the data start point is defined as the optical block of the specific MFS of the optical recording unit of the CD as Index. By doing so, it can be arbitrarily selected at a pitch of 17.3 mm in the circumferential direction. Further, in this case, if the MSF information of the optical frame of the index for each track is recorded as shown in FIG. 214, the Index information can be obtained simultaneously with the tracking. When Sync next to MSF is used as Index, recording can be started with an accuracy of 170.8 μm as shown in FIG. 213. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123, the magnetic recording is accurately performed on the Sync36 based on the Index.
You can start at 9, but you can't always end it exactly.
If it does not end correctly, the recording signal at the end causes Sync
369 is overwritten. To avoid this, the number of light pulses for one round should be known. Therefore, first, the optical recording unit of Index is rotated. Then, on the way, the light beam is returned to the original track by one track. Then again Index
Play to the optical address of. If the number of light pulses during this period is recorded, one revolution can be performed accurately. If the data thus measured is recorded in the magnetic recording portion of the magnetic track / optical address correspondence table of FIG. 214, that is, track 0 or track 1, it is not necessary to measure the number of pulses again.

Since the number of MSF blocks and the number of physical frames for one round are known in this manner, one frame, that is, magnetic recording is completed with a high accuracy of 173 μm as described above, so that the destruction of Sync369 can be prevented. Since Gap 374 can be minimized, the recording capacity can be increased.

In this case, in order to obtain synchronization, it is necessary to quickly obtain the subcode data. After the optical reproduction signal is EFM-decoded in FIG. 211, the subcode of the specific MSF is obtained from the subcode synchronization detection unit 456. Describing further in detail with reference to FIG. 215, the In code obtained from the subcode synchronization detection unit 456
The dex detection unit 457 compares with the subcode of the optical address of the specific magnetic track, and if they match, the data is output from the data buffer 9b and data recording is started from Sync of the block next to the Index address. In this case, since the subcode information that can be obtained fastest is used, the delay time is short and the cue can be accurately performed.

Incidentally, there is a possibility that the data of the optical address which becomes the Index is sometimes destroyed, and in this case the magnetic recording on the track cannot be performed. To avoid this, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, by defining an error-free optical address next to the optical address and recording the optical address MSF information in the magnetic track table of the magnetic recording section, the track can be used again. It has a great effect.

As a result, the effect that the means for detecting the absolute angle of the disk and the detection circuit can be omitted is obtained.
Further, since the head portion of the magnetic recording can be started from the portion of the arbitrary rotation angle, in the case of the CD, the data recording can be started immediately after reading the specific optical address information of the optical recording portion such as the subcode serving as the index. Therefore, at the time of reproduction, since the reproduction of the synchronous portion at the head of the magnetic data is started immediately after reading the optical address information of the track, there is no loss time of the rotation waiting time at the time of recording or reproducing the magnetic data,
There is also a great advantage that the actual data access time is shortened. This method is particularly effective when the same type of recording / reproducing apparatus is used.

Next, "variable track pitch mode"
Will be described. A general ROM disk is mounted like a game machine, and at the start of the program, the TOC track is read first, the specific track recorded with the program is read, and the specific track recorded with the data is read. This procedure is the same every time when rising. For example, when using a CAV optical disc,
As shown in FIG. 124, the first track 65b the 1004th track, the 65c second 2504th track 65d, the 3604th track
Let's assume that a fixed track such as the track 65e is accessed. When the hybrid disc of the present invention is used, if the magnetic information required at the time of rising is in a magnetic track other than the magnetic track on the back side of the optical track to be accessed at the time of rising, the device is an extra magnetic track in addition to the access to the optical track. Will be accessed. Therefore, the initial rise is delayed accordingly. Further, if the track pitches in the "normal mode" are evenly spaced, the probability that the center of the magnetic track will be behind the optical track is low. Therefore, it is necessary to access a magnetic track different from the optical track, and in this case as well, the rising speed becomes slow. In the "variable track pitch mode" of the present invention, for example, the four optical tracks 65b, 65c, 65 that need to be read at the above-mentioned rising edge.
magnetic tracks 67b, 67c, 67 on the back side of d, 65e.
There is a feature in defining d and 67e. That track N
The address information of the optical recording portion, which is an index corresponding to o and each track number, and the subcode information in the case of a CD are recorded in the TOC portion of the optical recording portion or the TOC portion of the magnetic recording portion. Next, if you set to record the data to be read on the magnetic track at the time of rising, such as the number of items acquired in the game at the end of the previous time, progress tribute, score, personal name, etc. Even if the magnetic track on which the necessary information is recorded is not specially accessed, the magnetic data is automatically accessed at the time of rising and the magnetic data is read at the time of rising, so there is no loss time and the effect of significantly increasing the rising time can be obtained. . In this case, the track pitches between the tracks are Tp1, Tp2, Tp3, Tp as shown in FIG.
It becomes 4 and takes a random value. Therefore, the recording capacity is slightly reduced, but the use in which the rising speed is prioritized is effective.

The "variable pitch mode" and "variable angle mode" are also effective for music purposes, for example, karaoke. When the present invention is applied to karaoke, it is possible to record and store personal environment setting data such as pitch height of each individual sung song, tempo of the song, amount of echo, DSP parameters, etc. for each song. With this, once set, the karaoke CD is automatically inserted into the karaoke machine, and the music is automatically reproduced with the pitch, tempo, and echo suitable for each individual.
The effect is that you can enjoy karaoke under conditions that suit your ability and taste. In this case, the magnetic tracks on the back side of the optical tracks 65b, 65c, 65d, and 65e, which are the beginning of each song, are defined, and the magnetic tracks 67 are defined.
b, 67c, 67d, 67e are recorded with individual karaoke data relating to the song. Then the light track 65c
When a karaoke song is selected, the setting data of the individual karaoke is recorded on the magnetic track 67c on the back side of the song, and when the playback of a specific song is started, the pitch of the song is changed during one rotation of the disc. , Tempo and echo are set, and music is output. As described above, even in the case of music, the variable pitch mode has a great effect that both optical data and magnetic data can be quickly accessed. This is effective when used for environment setting such as a DSP sound field for each song in a portable music application.

When the present invention is applied to a CDROM, a RAM capacity of about 32 kB can be obtained by setting Hc to 17500 e. The ROM capacity of the optical recording surface of the CDROM is 54
Since it is 0 MB, there is a capacity difference of nearly 100,000 times. Actual C
DROM products rarely use 540MB, and there is a few + MB free space even in the smallest case.
In the present invention, the free area of the ROM is used to record the compression / expansion program for data compression / expansion and various reference tables for compression in the ROM, and the data to be recorded in the RAM area is compressed. This method will be described with reference to the compression method diagram of FIG. In the case of a game, for example, the optical recording unit 4 has information that is considered to be necessary in the course of a program such as a game and has a strong correlation with the game content, for example, a reference for compressing a place name reference table 368a or a person name reference table 368b. The table is pre-recorded. RO
Since the free space of M is large, various reference tables of information such as personal names, place names, etc., which are considered to be frequently used, can be prepared. For example, "Washington
When the word "on" is recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3 which is the RAM area, the area of 80 bits is consumed as it is. However, in the case of the present invention, the compression reference table 36.
8a, "Washington" is "10"
You can see that it is defined in the binary code of. In this case, 80-bit data has been compressed into 2-bit data of "10". By recording this compressed data in the magnetic recording layer 3, recording can be performed with a capacity of 1/40. It is generally known that a lossless compression method can achieve 2-3 times compression. However, by using this compression method, data can be compressed 10 times or more if the application is limited. Is equivalent to As described above, in the case of the hybrid disc of the present invention, the physical ROM capacity is reduced by using the ROM area of the optical recording unit, but compression is performed, so that the substantial logical RAM storage capacity can be remarkably increased. is there. In FIG. 125, since the compression / expansion program is recorded in the ROM section of the optical recording section, there is an effect that the substantial capacity of the RAM area is not reduced. If the RAM area of the magnetic recording unit has a sufficient margin, the compression / decompression program may be recorded in the magnetic recording unit. Specifically H
This can be realized by using the ulfman optimal encoding method or the Ziv-Lempel data compression method. Ziv-
By creating a reference table and a Hash function in the Lempel system in advance and recording them in the optical recording unit, it is possible to lower the recording data in the magnetic recording unit.

Here, an example of a specific overall operation will be described with reference to the flow charts of all operations in FIGS. 127 and 128.

First, with the magnetic head lifted, a disk is mounted in step 410, and the magnetic head is returned to its home position in step 411. In step 412, the optical head is TO
Moving to the C track, in step 413, TOC optical data is read. The first method is realized by using the control bits Q _{1 to} Q ₄ of the subcode in the CD data diagram of FIG. 213. When Q ₃ = 1 is defined as having a magnetic recording layer, the magnetic layer can be identified. Then, the data track of the magnetic layer is arranged after the optical track, for example, in FIG. 213, Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0000 and 1
000, 0001, 1001 and 0100 are already in use. Therefore, if Q ₁ , Q ₂ , Q ₃ , Q ₄ = 0, ₁ , ₁ , 0 is defined as a magnetic data track, the format information of the magnetic track can be recorded in the TOC. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the physical position of the CD of the optical recording section, which is the index that is the starting point of recording and reproduction of each magnetic track, is recorded. For example, for track 1, MS
When the optical head accesses F, that is, the block of 3 minutes 15 seconds 55 frames, the magnetic head accesses the first track. As shown in FIG. 213, I indicating the recording start position
An index of 17.3 mm can be obtained using only the MSF information. To further improve the accuracy, specify a specific frame of a specific MSF with an accuracy of 176 μm.
The signal is obtained. Therefore, for example, if an Index is created with the Sync signal of the block next to the specific MSF block and recording is started, it is possible to find the beginning of recording and reproduction with an accuracy of 176 μm. In this case, as described in FIG. 123, CL
Since the Indexes are not aligned on a certain angle due to V, the Indexes of the tracks are different, but this may be used for actual recording / reproduction. Since the Index is obtained by using the MSF information in this way, there is no need to specially provide the Index, which has the effect of simplifying the configuration. This data contains a flag indicating whether or not the optical disk has a magnetic recording portion, address information such as the subcode number of the CD corresponding to the position of each default magnetic track of the magnetic data, and the presence or absence of the variable pitch mode. . In step 414, the presence or absence of the flag of the magnetic recording layer is confirmed. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 418, and if No, the optical mark indicating the presence or absence of the magnetic recording layer on the magnetic recording surface or the like is read in step 415, and the optical mark is determined in step 416. If not, the process jumps to step 417 of block 8 and no magnetic recording / reproduction is performed on this disc. In step 418, the magnetic recording / reproducing mode is entered, and the magnetic track initialization step 402 is entered. In step 419, the magnetic head is lowered onto the medium surface, and in step 420
After reading the magnetic data of the TOC at step 421
Raise the magnetic head to prevent abrasion. Step 422
At step 423a, the error flag indicating the error state of the magnetic data is checked, and if there is a flag, the process goes to block 5. In the block 5 cleaning instruction block 427 of the magnetic disk surface, the optical disk is ejected in step 427a, and in step 427b, a message "Clean the optical disk" is displayed on the display unit of the device and step 427 is executed.
Stop at c. On the other hand, in step 424, it is checked whether the optical address correspondence table of each magnetic track is the default value recorded on the optical recording surface side. If NO, step 4
At 26, based on the magnetic data information of the TOC track, the contents of a part of the magnetic track one-optical address correspondence table are updated,
Save it to the internal memory of the main unit. If yes, block 1
The reproduction block 403 is entered.

At step 428, if there is a read command of the magnetic track, the process goes to block 2, and if it comes, step 4
29, the process goes to block 2 if the mode is not the variable track pitch mode, and if so, the optical track group number n is set to 0 in step 430. N in step 431
Is set to n + 1, and if n is the final value in step 432, the process jumps to step 438, and if the final value is not reached, step 4
At 33, the leading optical track of the nth optical track group is accessed. In step 434, if the default magnetic track is acceptable, in step 436 the magnetic head is moved to the medium surface as it is, in step 437 magnetic data is read and stored in the internal memory, and the process returns to step 431. On the other hand, if the optical address corresponding to the magnetic head has no default value, the optical address other than the default value is accessed in step 435, the magnetic data is read in steps 436 and 437, and the process returns to step 431. Step 431
If n is incremented by 1 in step 432 and n reaches the final value in step 432, reading of optical data and reading of magnetic data is completed in step 438. Therefore, in the case of a game machine, the game program is started, and the magnetic recording unit is recorded. Based on the recorded data, the previously finished game scene is reproduced. At step 439, the magnetic head is raised to the internal “memory rewrite” block 405 of block 3.

Now, returning to step 429, if the mode is not the variable track pitch mode, the process jumps to the normal track pitch mode 405 of the block 2. If it is not the normal track pitch mode in step 440, the process jumps to block 3, and if Yes, in step 411, an access command for the nth magnetic track is received, and step 44 is executed.
At 2, wait for the optical address corresponding to the nth magnetic track in the internal memory of the microcomputer 10, and then step 443.
Then, immediately after accessing this optical address, step 4
The magnetic data is read at 44, stored in the internal memory at step 445, and the process jumps to block 3. In the rewriting step 405 of block 3, in step 446, it is checked whether or not there is a rewriting command.
5 and if Yes, check in step 447 if it is the final accumulation instruction, and if Yes, go to block 5 and "N".
If "o", the process proceeds to step 448. At step 448, it is checked whether the magnetic data to be rewritten exists in the internal memory of the main body. If "Yes", the process jumps to step 454, magnetic recording is not performed, and only the internal memory is rewritten. If "No", the optical track one-optical address correspondence table is checked in step 449 to access a specific optical track, the magnetic head is lowered in step 450, and step 4
At 51, 452 and 453, the magnetic data is read out, stored in the internal memory, and the magnetic head is raised. At step 454, the information transferred to the internal memory is rewritten, and the process goes to block 4.

Final accumulation block 406 of block number 4
First, in step 455, it is checked whether it is the final accumulation instruction. If "No", in step 458, if the work is completed, the process jumps to block 6, and if the work is not completed, the process jumps to block 1 and returns. If Yes in step 455, in step 456, it is checked whether or not there is updated data in the magnetic data in the internal memory, only the updated portion is extracted, and if there is no update in step 457, the process proceeds to step 458,
If there is an update, the optical address of the corresponding magnetic track is accessed in step 459, and steps 460, 470, 4 are executed.
At 71, the magnetic head is lowered, magnetic data is recorded immediately after the detection of the optical address, and the recorded data is checked. If the error rate is large in step 472, the process jumps to the magnetic head cleaning block 408 of block 7, and step 48
The magnetic head is raised at 1 and 482, the magnetic head is cleaned by the head cleaning unit, recording is performed again at step 483, the error rate is checked, and if OK, the process goes to block 1, and if not, the magnetic disk at block 5 is cleaned. Jump to the instruction block.

Returning to step 472, if the error rate is small, it is checked in step 473 whether recording is completed. If "N0", the process returns to step 470. If the result is Yes, the magnetic head is raised in step 474, and in step 475 the entire recording is completed. If the work is completed, the process proceeds to the end block of block 6, and if not completed, the process returns to block 1.

At the end step 407 of this block 6, the magnetic head is raised at step 476, the magnetic head is cleaned at the magnetic head clean portion at 477, and if there is an EJECT command at step 478, the optical disk is ejected at step 479. , EJECT does not need to be stopped at step 480. The recording / reproducing apparatus according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention operates according to the above flow chart.

The mixed noise is reduced even if a band filter having the same band as the frequency distribution of the reproduction signal of the magnetic head is added to the drive circuit of the actuator 18. Also, the electromagnetic noise is reduced by accessing the magnetic track and then turning off the drive current of the actuator of the optical head 6, reproducing by the magnetic head 8b, and starting the driving of the actuator at the end of reproduction.

Many existing CDs have a thick printing ink applied on the back surface by screen printing or the like, and have a thickness of several tens of μm.
There are irregularities. If the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with such a CD, the printing ink on the uneven portion may drop off and be damaged. When the recording medium 2 having the magnetic shield layer 69 is inserted, as shown in the ON state of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 115 when the recording medium is inserted, there is no magnetic shield layer 69 as shown in the OFF state. Electromagnetic noise from the actuator of the optical head 6 is significantly reduced as compared with the case where the recording medium 2 is inserted. This noise is output from the magnetic head reproducing circuit 30 and can be easily detected. That is, the recording medium of the present invention and the conventional recording medium such as a CD can be discriminated without contacting the magnetic head 8 with the magnetic recording layer 3. Then, the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with the back surface of the recording medium having no magnetic recording layer such as CD or LD by bringing the magnetic head 8 into contact with the recording surface only when the recording medium having the magnetic recording layer of the present invention is inserted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the printed matter on the back surface and the optical recording surface from being damaged by the magnetic head. As another method, referring to FIG. 111, the TOC of the optical recording portion of the CD
Discriminating code indicating that the magnetic recording layer of the medium exists in the optical track portion in the vicinity of the magnetic field and the TOC portion is read in advance, and the optical TOC is read without the magnetic head 8 coming into contact with the medium to discriminate the magnetic layer. Only when the code is detected, the magnetic head 8 is lowered onto the medium surface. By this method, existing CD
Since the magnetic head 8 does not come into contact with either the optical recording side or the printing side of the medium when is inserted, there is an effect that damage to the existing CD is prevented. A specific optical mark may be provided on the printed surface of the optical disc, and the presence of the magnetic recording layer may be determined only when the mark is present.

(Fourteenth Embodiment) A fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 134 shows a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14 of the present invention.

In this embodiment, the magnetic recording portion 3 is recorded or reproduced by performing modulation or demodulation based on the optical clock signal 382 of the optical recording / reproducing signal on the optical recording surface of the recording medium 2. Since the basic operation is the same as that in the case of FIG. 110, detailed description of the entire operation is omitted.

In FIG. 134, the optical clock 382 is reproduced from the optical reproduction signal in the clock reproduction circuit 38a in the optical reproduction circuit. The optical clock 382 is frequency-divided, and the magnetic clock signal 383 shown in FIGS. 134 and 135 is generated in the clock circuit 29a in the magnetic recording circuit 29, and becomes the clock at the time of modulation by the modulation circuit 334. FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining this state in detail. The optical clock of the clock regeneration unit 38a of the optical regeneration circuit is 4.3 MHz.
Is. This signal is dropped by a frequency divider 457 into a modulation clock signal of the MFM modulator 334 of the present invention of 15 to 30 KHZ, and magnetically recorded. As mentioned above, Index is indexed.
The detection unit 457 detects the optical address and performs the operation. The rotation control of the motor in this case is performed based on the optical signal. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 218, magnetic recording is started by the periodic signal after the optical index.

When reproducing the magnetic signal, the magnetic reproducing circuit 30
Magnetic clock signal 383 in the clock circuit 30a of
Is reproduced and becomes a clock for demodulation by the demodulation unit 30a. The operation during magnetic reproduction will be described in detail with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 217. In this case, after reproducing the optical address of Index, the optical pickup 6 is read as shown in FIG. 218 (d).
The actuator is powered off, magnetic reproduction is turned on after electromagnetic noise disappears, and data demodulation and motor rotation control are performed based on the magnetic recording signal. The reproduction signal from the magnetic head 8 is shaped by the waveform shaping unit 466, and the clock reproduction unit 467 reproduces an approximate reproduction clock, and the pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462.
Sent to. In the magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 459, the magnetic synchronization clock signal is reproduced, demodulated into a digital signal by the MFM demodulator 30b, and error-corrected by the error correction unit 36.
It is output as magnetic reproduction data. Since the magnetic reproduction signal is obtained by dividing the optical reproduction signal by a constant division ratio, when the optical reproduction signal is switched to the magnetic reproduction signal, the PLL 459a of the magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 459 is switched from optical to magnetic. Since the signal obtained by dividing the optical reproduction clock until just before is sent as reference information, the pull-in center frequency is set in the vicinity of this. Therefore, when the light is switched to the magnetism, it is pulled in by the magnetic reproduction clock PLL in a short time. A magnetic recording clock is generated by dividing the optical reproduction clock, and magnetic recording is performed, so that the optical reproduction clock can be switched to the magnetic reproduction clock in a short time even when the optical head 6 is turned off during reproduction of a magnetic signal. effective. When the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 run on the same circumference or on different circumferences, a constant division ratio is sufficient, but when running on different circumferences without being fixed. Can be calculated by calculating the frequency division ratios by obtaining the radii r _M and r _O.

Next, the rotation control method will be described. Rotation control during light reproduction is performed by the shortest / longest pulse detection unit 460 of the motor rotation control unit 26 of FIG. 217 to generate an approximate optical synchronization signal by the pseudo optical synchronization signal generator 461 and by the motor control unit 26a. 17 rotations,
Rotate to the specified rotation speed at the feed rotation speed. At this time,
The changeover switch 465 is in the B position. When the optical synchronization signal detector 465 is synchronized, the changeover switch 465
To switch the switch from B to A. Then, at t = t ₂ in the time chart of FIG.
Immediately after switching to magnetic reproduction, the period T of the MFM of the magnetic reproduction signal is measured by the waveform shaping section 466, and in the case of the present invention, a magnetic synchronization signal of 15 KHz or 30 KHz is obtained. This signal is frequency-divided / multiplied by a pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generator 462.
Then, the optical rotation synchronizing signal and the clock frequency are combined and sent to the changeover switch 465. Immediately after switching from light to magnetism, the changeover switch 465 switches from A to C, and rough rotation control is performed. After that, when the PLL 459a of the magnetic synchronization signal detector 459 is locked, the changeover switch is switched from C to D, and accurate rotation control is performed by the magnetic synchronization signal. Thus, at time t = t _{3 in} the timing chart of FIG. 218, the magnetic reproduction signal is synchronized with the reproduction clock, so that the magnetic data is continuously demodulated.

When an error occurs due to a scratch on the medium surface at t = t ₄ , and te continues for a certain period of time, t = t ₅
At, the magnetic reproduction is turned off, the optical reproduction is turned on, and the rotation control by the optical reproduction signal is performed for the period of t _R to stabilize the rotation of the motor.

When the period of t _R has elapsed, the optical reproduction is turned off and the magnetic reproduction is turned on at t = t ₇ . Since the error has ended, the shift of the rotation control from light to magnetism is completed in a short time, and the magnetic recording synchronization signal is reproduced at t = t ₈ , so that Data 5 is surely reproduced. In this way, even if there is an error due to a scratch on the medium, it can be recovered in a short time, and it does not become a place-name data error. In this way, magnetic reproduction is performed while switching between optical reproduction, signal-based rotation control, and magnetic reproduction signal-based rotation control in a time-division manner, so that a stable magnetic signal reproduction is possible without being affected by electromagnetic noise from the optical pickup during optical reproduction. There is an effect that it becomes possible. Even when the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are arranged at a distance of 1 cm or more, magnetic reproduction can be performed using the method of FIGS. 217 and 218. In this case, optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed simultaneously. The motor 17 rotates at the rotational speed synchronized with the exchange.

As shown in FIG. 135, the rotation speed ω of the recording medium 2 largely fluctuates due to uneven rotation of the motor called wow and flutter. When the magnetic recording clock is fixed, the magnetic recording signal recording wavelength λ on the recording medium 2 varies variously due to the above variation even on the same track. As shown in FIG. 135 of the present invention, a magnetic clock 383 is generated from the optical reproduction clock 382 by frequency division or the like to perform magnetic recording, so that a magnetic recording signal having a cycle of an accurate length is recorded on the recording medium 2. Can be recorded. Therefore, there is an effect that reliable recording can be performed at the shortest recording wavelength. Further, since the recording signal can be accurately arranged in one track of the recording section for recording one rotation, the guard gap section 374 for preventing the overlapping recording described in FIG. 123 can be set to the minimum.

Even when the magnetic signal is reproduced, the demodulated clock can be accurately reproduced by dividing the frequency of the optical clock signal as shown in FIG. Therefore, the range of the demodulation determination window time 385 during reproduction can be set narrow. Therefore, there is an effect that the data discrimination ability is improved and the error rate is improved.

Further, by using this optical recording / reproducing clock, the recording capacity can be increased to double or triple. Normal 2
In the value recording, only 1 bit can be recorded in one symbol as shown by Data1 in FIG. However, re in Fig. 132
The optical clock signal 382 as shown in the process2.
It is possible to apply the time width modulation of the magnetic recording signal 384, that is, PWM by using the accurate time Top of the above. By magnetically modulating the waveform of one symbol, the magnetic recording signal 384
By assigning four values of 00, 01, 10 and 11, that is, 2 bits to four time widths of a, 384b, 384c, and 384d, the recording data amount can be increased because the number increases from 1 bit to 2 bits per symbol. it can. In this case, as shown in the signal 384d, the uniform period To
When recorded at, λ / 2 is t ₃ '-t ₃ = To as shown in the figure.
-DT, which is the shortest recording wavelength, that is, the shortest recording period Tm.
Since it is less than in, normal recording cannot be performed. Therefore, shifting the magnetic clock only dT where t = t ₃ of the magnetic recording signal 384d as a new starting point. Then, t ₄ = t ₃ '
determination window 384 next to dT times to determine the 00 Data2, t _5, t _6, when the pulse t _7,
Data of 01, 10, 11 and 2 bits are demodulated.

Thus, it is 1 for binary recording such as NRZ.
Although only 1 bit can be recorded per symbol, 2 bits can be recorded according to the present invention. If the modulation width of the pulse width modulation is 8 kinds, it is 3 bits per symbol, and if it is 16 kinds, it is 4 bits per symbol. This is because the wavelength of the optical recording is 1 μm or less, whereas the wavelength of the magnetic recording of the present invention has a lot of space loss, so that it is 10 μm to 10 μm.
Since it is 0 μm, there is a wavelength difference of several tens to 100 times. Therefore, there is an effect that the pulse interval of the magnetic recording signal can be measured by using the clock signal of the optical signal with a resolution of several tenths to one hundredth of the wavelength of the magnetic recording signal.
From this, the recording capacity theoretically becomes several tens to 100 times the recording capacity of the binary recording due to the combination of the PWM and the optical signal clock. Actually, a recording capacity of several times to several tens of times can be obtained due to waveform distortion of magnetic recording.

As described above, the first method has an effect that the recording can be always performed at a constant recording wavelength by using the accurate optical recording clock signal recorded in the CDROM as the reference clock signal. In the second method, the recording capacity can be increased from several times to several tens of times by performing PWM (pulse width modulation) using the optical recording clock signal as a reference signal.

Next, the method of detecting the area of the magnetic recording portion in advance to prevent the magnetic head from being destroyed will be described in more detail. The area of the magnetic recording portion of the recording medium 2 of the present invention varies depending on the application. CD ROM for games and CD for personal computers
Since the ROM requires a large recording capacity, the recording area of each track is set on the entire surface of the recording medium 2. On the other hand, the amount of information required to record the information such as the music title and the music order and the copy protection code information on the music CD may be about several hundred B. In this case, since the recording area of one track to several tracks is sufficient, the remaining portion of the CD excluding the magnetic track portion can be printed on the printing surface side with many irregularities such as screen printing. It is also possible to provide a one-track magnetic track on the inner or outer circumference of the optical recording surface. In the case of one track, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and (b), the lifting motor 2
Since the recording material can be added to the read-only disk by simply adding 1, the elevating circuit 22, the magnetic recording / reproducing block 9, and the magnetic head 8, there is an effect that the configuration is simple and the cost is low. In the case of the 1-track system, the recording capacity is small at the inner circumference. As shown at 67f in FIG. 124, when used for a CD by recording only one track of the outermost magnetic track 67f, even one track has a wavelength of 40
A capacity of 2 KB is obtained in μm. In this case, since an access mechanism to the truck is unnecessary, the structure is simplified and the size is reduced.

In this case, when the CD is loaded, the rotary motor 17 is driven by CLV at the same time as the TOC of the optical track 64a of FIG. Since the TOC radius of the CD is constant, it rotates at a low speed. Magnetic recording / reproduction is performed in this state. The magnetic recording index signal and sync signal are read from the optical track 65.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 84, the TOC portion or T
If the optical track 65 around the OC contains information indicating that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, the optical recording block 7 detects this information and drives the head elevating motor 21.
As shown in (b), the magnetic head 8 is brought into contact with the magnetic recording layer 3 to reproduce the magnetic recording signal.

Playback data is stored in the memory section 3 of the recording / playback apparatus 1.
No. 4 is temporarily stored, and this data is used for updating to reduce the number of times of actual magnetic recording and reproduction and reduce wear.

As shown in FIG. 84, the optical track 6 of the TOC
Outermost magnetic track 67f for 5a and 1 track
Are recorded and reproduced at the same time, the physical distance is close to 3 cm. Therefore, as shown in FIG.
The electromagnetic noise generated by the
It decreases by dB. Therefore, there is an effect that the mixed noise is greatly reduced.

In the case of the 1-track system, the magnetic recording layer 3 is
Since the outer peripheral portion is used, it may be provided on the surface on the optical recording side. In this case, the magnetic recording layer 3a and the magnetic head 8a indicated by dotted lines in FIG.
As shown in the lifting motor 21a, the upper lid 38a type C
When used in a D player, the magnetic head 8a is placed on the bottom surface of the CD.
Since it is accommodated, the size can be reduced and the structure can be simplified because it is not necessary to provide the upper lid.

Further, the magnetic recording layer 3a shown in FIG.
By forming it on the side by a thick film method such as screen printing, a thickness of several tens of μm to several hundreds of μm, that is, a height is generated. Due to this height, the magnetic head 8a contacts only the magnetic recording layer 3a and does not contact the transparent substrate 5. Therefore, the transparent substrate 5 is not scratched, and there is an effect that it does not hinder the optical recording and reproduction. In this case, since the magnetic recording section is provided, the capacity of the optical recording section is reduced accordingly. Also, FIG.
As shown at the left end of the
Only the ho of mm or more is fixed, and the CD is bent by pressing the rubber roller 21d in the direction of the arrow 51 by the elevating part 21b attached to the upper lid 38a or the like.
The magnetic recording portion 3b contacts the magnetic head 8a. In this case, since pressure is applied, there is an effect that even if dust is present, contact is made and magnetic recording characteristics are improved.

In this case, the CD is obtained by applying a magnetic recording material by screen printing a magnetic track 67f on the outermost peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side as shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. In practice, it can be obtained by inverting and printing a CD in a conventional CD printing screen printing process.

Since the existing CD manufacturing line can be used, there is a great effect that no capital investment is required. In this case, when the magnetic head comes into contact with a printed area having many irregularities such as screen printing of a printing section or the transparent substrate section on the optical recording surface side, both are damaged. In order to avoid this damage, an optical mark 387 is provided on the magnetic recording surface side of the recording medium 2 as shown in the sectional view of the magnetic recording apparatus of FIG. This optical mark may be provided on the opposite surface. This optical mark 387
Is printed with optical data such as a bar code on the circumference showing the size of the magnetic recording area. Data such as a bar code of the optical mark 387 can be read by the optical sensor 386 provided on the magnetic head 8 side. The data reproduction of the barcode can be easily performed by the conventional method by the light detection unit 386 which is a combination of the LED and the light sensor. The optical mark portion 387 may be provided on the inner circumference of the TOC portion of the CD in the figure, but by providing it on the inner circumference portion of the TOC portion, it is possible to prevent sliding scratches and stains by the magnetic head 8.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b) and FIG. 145 (a), the bar code of the optical mark 387 includes information indicating a region (r = 1m) in the radial direction of the magnetic recording layer of the CD and the magnetic recording material. Hc value, encryption information for copy guard, C
The ID No. of the Disk that is different for each D. Information such as is recorded. In this way, since the optical mark 387 can be identified by reading it in advance, it is possible to prevent the magnetic head 8 from contacting the recording medium 2 other than the region of the magnetic recording layer. Therefore, there is an effect that the above-mentioned destruction of the magnetic head can be prevented.

Next, another structure of the optical mark will be described. CD
In the case of 1, the optical recording portion is usually not provided on the inner peripheral portion of the TOC. In the area without the optical recording portion, a transparent portion 388 without the optical recording layer is provided as shown in FIG. Then, the back side of the optical mark 387 can be seen from the optical head 6 side through the light transmitting portion 388. By printing an optical mark such as a bar code on the recording medium side of the optical mark 387, the optical head 6
Thus, the optical mark 387 can be read. This method has an effect that the optical sensor 386 can be omitted. As another method of reading, the optical sensor 386 can be provided on the optical head 6 side. In this case, since the optical sensor 386 can be provided on the fixed portion side in the upper lid opening / closing type CD player as shown in FIG. 131, there is an effect that the wiring is simplified.

Regarding the information of the optical mark 387, the reflected light may be read by the optical head 6 or the transmitted light may be read by the optical sensor 386. Also, by sharing the optical sensor 386 with a conventional optical sensor that detects the presence or absence of a CD,
This has the effect of reducing the number of parts. In addition, an optical mark can be created at the time of manufacturing the optical recording film by intermittently providing an optical recording layer by vapor deposition of aluminum or the like and forming it in a circumferential bar code shape. In this case, there is an effect that the manufacturing process of the optical mark becomes unnecessary. 131 (b) and FIG.
As shown in the CD manufacturing process diagram of FIG. 44 (a) and the CD top view of FIG. 145 (a), the magnetic recording region 398, the print 45, and the optical recording layer 398 are formed by a single process of applying the magnetic material when the magnetic recording layer 3 is manufactured. By applying the mark 387 twice with the screen printing material 399, three films can be formed in one step. The printed surface of the CD is as shown in FIG. Since the material of particularly high Hc is black, the contrast of the title print 45 is increased. By screen-printing, the recording medium 2 of the present invention can be virtually created by simply changing the printing ink of the conventional CD manufacturing line to a high Hc magnetic material ink, so that the cost is almost the same as the existing CD and there is no capital investment. This has the great effect that a CD with RAM can be obtained.

Bar code 387 as shown in FIG.
Data “204312001” can be read from a. D different for each disc on screen printing machine 399)
The ID No. is printed on the CD by printing the data. Can be printed. When the CD copy prevention screen printing machine 399, which can perform copy protection by recording the key unlocking program in the optical recording unit or magnetic recording unit of the CD using this, cannot change the print contents one by one, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4B, the barcode 3 is printed by the circumferential barcode printer 400 in the process described in FIG.
87a, a number 387b indicating a disc ID in some cases,
Is printed. In this case, normal ink may be used and the printing surface is as shown in FIG. 145 (b). In this case, the user can visually check the disc ID No. It has the effect of being able to read. Also, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the ID is OCR characters in the barcode part 387a.
No. By printing the numeral 387b, the disc ID number. Can be confirmed. There is an effect. Also, as shown by the dotted line on the right side of FIG. 144 (a), the second printing machine 399a prints 4000
A high Hc magnetic recording area 401 of Hc higher than that of the magnetic recording portion 398 such as Oe is provided. This area can be reproduced by a normal recording / reproducing apparatus, but cannot be recorded. For this reason, the disk ID No. And record the code. Then, since a special process is required, there is an effect that it is more difficult to copy by an illegal trader. Also, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), a space 402a is provided in the optical disc 2, magnetic powder 402 such as iron powder is put therein, and magnetic portion 403 having Hc such as iron is provided on the upper portion.
To provide. Then, when it is not magnetized,
As shown in (a), the magnetic powder 402 is not attracted to the magnetic part 403, and no character is shown. However, when magnetized by a multi-channel magnetic head, the magnetic powder 402 is adsorbed and no characters appear, as shown in FIG. 146 (b). When the OCR character described in FIG. 145 (c) is recorded, the user can see the arrow 51a.
This OCR character can be visually recognized from the direction. On the other hand, the magnetic head 8 has an ID No. It is possible to read magnetically recorded information such as. When this method is used, it is not necessary to change the ID of each sheet for printing in the disc process. ID no. Since it is only necessary to magnetically record such data for each sheet, there is an effect that a conventional process can be used and new capital investment is unnecessary.

As shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. 98, the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer peripheral portion on the transparent substrate 5 side and the fraud prevention copy signal is recorded at the factory, since the conventional CDROM caddy can be used. There is an effect that compatibility of can be taken. Further, in the case of an MD reproduction-only disc, the shutter has a window only on one side, but the present invention can be applied to a single-sided window shutter by providing a magnetic layer on the transparent substrate side.

Now, here, this ID No. This paper describes a copy protection method using and a key release method for each software. First, there is a logically locked program on the CD.
It is assumed that there are 00 bottles. User I
DNo. The ID No. from the company. Key No. corresponding to To be notified. The key No. for this tenth program Is recorded on the magnetic recording unit TOC of the CD or the like. Then, when the 10th program of this CD is reproduced next time, the key information recorded on the magnetic recording layer and the ID No. recorded on the optical mark portion. By inputting and into the use permission program, the use of the program is permitted with the correct key, and the program can be used without any procedure every time. In the case of a conventional CD or CDROM, ID No. It is necessary for the user to input the key and the key each time. In the case of the present invention, 1
The effect is that the program can be used without entering a key once it is entered. Furthermore, ID No. Cannot be rewritten and is different for each disc, so even if the key information of a disc for one individual is input to another personal disc, the key is not released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the use of the CDROM software without paying the software fee.

Next, in the case of a portable CD player, as shown in FIG. 131, an upper lid 389 that opens and closes up and down is provided, and a method of attaching and detaching a CD is generally adopted. In the present invention, the magnetic head 8 is opened and closed when the upper lid 389 is opened and closed.
And the magnetic head traverse shaft 363b is the upper lid 38.
It is opened and closed in conjunction with 9. When the upper lid 389 is in the “open” state, the magnetic head 8 is separated from the recording medium 2 together with the upper lid 389 as shown in FIG. 131, so that the recording medium 2 can be easily attached and detached. When the upper cover 389 is “open”, the upper cover 389 is closed and the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse shaft 363b approach the vicinity of the recording medium 2. The head actuator 22 makes the magnetic head 8 contact the recording medium 2 only when magnetic recording / reproduction is necessary.

The optical head 6 is the traverse actuator 2
3 and traverse gear 367b and traverse shaft 36
Tracked by 3a. At this time, it is transmitted to the traverse gear 367c by the traverse gear 367a, and the magnetic head traverse shaft 367b moves in the direction indicated by the arrow 51
Move in the direction. In this way, the magnetic head 8 moves in the same direction by the same distance in conjunction with the optical head 6, so that when the upper lid 389 is closed, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are aligned as described above. In other words, the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 access a predetermined magnetic track on the back side of the preset optical track.

By thus moving the magnetic head 8 and the magnetic head traverse in conjunction with the upper cover 389, the present invention can be applied to a CD player of the upper cover opening / closing system, so that the entire player is downsized. There is an effect that can be converted.

Next, a cartridge for accommodating the CDROM of the present invention will be described. First, FIG. 133 shows a perspective view of the optical disk cartridge of the present invention. Now, with reference to this drawing, a conventional cartridge for a CDROM will be described. A conventional cartridge for a CDROM has a cassette lid 397 which rotates in the direction of an arrow 51c around a rotation shaft 39 for taking out a recording medium 2 such as a CDROM, and at the same time, has a window on the optical recording surface side on the back side of the drawing. It has a shutter 301 for the recording surface.

In the case of the cartridge of the present invention, a magnetic surface shutter 391 is added to the cassette lid 390.
When the shutter 392 on the optical recording surface opens in the direction of arrow 51a,
When the window of the optical recording unit opens, the coupling unit 392 causes the magnetic surface shutter 391 to slide in the direction of the arrow 51a, and the window of the recording medium 2 on the magnetic recording surface side opens. Thus, by using the disc cassette 42 of the present invention, a CD can be attached and detached, and at the same time, the windows on both sides of the magnetic recording surface and the optical recording surface are
Since it can be opened and closed, there is an effect that the optical recording / reproducing of the present invention and the magnetic recording / reproducing can be simultaneously performed. Further, there is an effect that it is completely compatible with the conventional single-sided window type CDROM cartridge for optical recording and reproduction.

(Fifteenth Embodiment) In the first, second and third embodiments described above, the example in which the auxiliary magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on one surface of the recording medium 2 in the cartridge 42 has been described. The fifteenth embodiment shows the case where the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the outer surface of the cartridge 42 of the disk 2. FIG. 136 shows a block diagram of the entire recording / reproducing apparatus of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 137a, b, c and FIG.
38a, b, and c respectively show the recording / reproducing states at the time of inserting, fixing, and ejecting the cartridge of the fifteenth embodiment. See also FIG.
39a, b, c show the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 137a, b, c.

FIG. 136 shows an overall block diagram. The basic configuration and principle of the optical recording / reproducing unit and the magnetic recording / reproducing unit are the same as the configuration in which the noise canceller of the magnetic recording / reproducing unit is removed from the block diagram of FIG. 87 and the block diagram of FIG. 110. Omit it.

The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of FIG. 136 has an insertion opening 394 for the disc cartridge 42, and FIG. 136 shows the state after the cartridge 42 is inserted in the direction of arrow 51.

The perspective views of FIG. 137 and FIG. 138 at the time of inserting and removing the cartridge show the state when the cassette is attached and detached, and FIG. 139 shows the cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), when the cartridge 42 is inserted into the recording / reproducing apparatus 1, first, the optical sensor 386 causes the optical mark 387 such as a bar code provided on a part of the label portion 396 to be illuminated. The sensor 386 reads the data, and the optical reproduction circuit 38 of FIG. 136 reproduces the data and the clock reproduction circuit 389 reproduces the synchronous clock signal. The above reproduction data is sent to the system control unit 10,
If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent and the head actuator 21 causes the head elevating unit 20 to move.
Thus, the magnetic heads 8a and 8b are moved toward the magnetic recording layer 3. Thus, the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 is transferred to the magnetic heads 8a. 8b and demodulated into data by the demodulators 341a and 341b of the first and second magnetic reproducing circuits 30a and 30b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal reproduced by the clock reproducing circuit 38a based on the signal of the optical mark portion 387, demodulation can be surely performed even if the traveling speed changes. Therefore, there is an effect that the data recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3 can be surely read even if the cartridge 42 is manually inserted and the traveling speed at the time of insertion largely fluctuates. Further, by recording identification information such as the cartridge ID No. or software title name in the optical mark 387, data can be managed for each cassette.

In this case, only one magnetic head 8 is required. However, by reading and writing the same data twice with two magnetic heads as shown in FIG. 136, the reliability of reading the data is improved. The synthesizing circuit 397 synthesizes the error-free portions of the data 1 and the data 2 to create error-free complete data, reproduces data including index information such as TOC data, and stores it in the IC memory 34. The TOC data includes information on the previous directory of the cartridge 42, the recording / reproducing process, and the result. Therefore, when the cartridge 42 is inserted, the contents and progress of the optical disc can be known.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b), magnetic recording / reproduction is arbitrarily performed while the cartridge 42 is mounted therein, new information is added, or recorded information is deleted. It is done. In this case, the contents of TOC must be changed each time, but in the case of the present invention,
As described repeatedly in many of the previous embodiments, the TOC of the IC memory 34 is not rewritten without rewriting the data of the magnetic recording layer 3.
Rewrite the data. Thus, the new TOC data in the IC memory 34 and the old TOC data in the magnetic recording layer 3 have different data contents. As shown in FIG. 137 (c), the data in the magnetic recording layer is updated by the magnetic head 8b when the cartridge 42 is taken out. The written data is immediately reproduced and verified by the magnetic head 8b.

In this case, when the number of tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3 is 1, no device is required. However, when there are multiple tracks, for example, three tracks, by rewriting the data of only the track, for example, the second track, of which the TOC data needs to be rewritten, mistakes during recording are reduced. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C),
When the cartridge 42 is taken out, only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b.

This is completed for one head. Meanwhile, Figure 1
In the case of two heads such as 37, the signals 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a are simultaneously read and an error check is performed. As shown in FIG. 139C, the magnetic signal 68a recorded by the magnetic head 8b can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 displays an error message on the display unit 16 and displays the message "Please insert the cassette into the main body again." At the same time, the operator is instructed to insert the cartridge 42 into the insertion portion 394 again. When inserted again, when ejecting,
Since the C data is recorded, the second time can be recorded with a high probability without error. When this is repeated many times, it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 is destroyed, the ID No. of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID No. is inserted again, The magnetic data is not read without issuing a command to lower the magnetic head 8. The data of this ID No is backed up and stored in the IC memory 34. In this way, TOC data can be surely recorded and reproduced in the cartridge 42 of each disk. The present invention has an effect that the table of contents of a disc can be detected when the disc cartridge is inserted by adding a few parts. Since it is only necessary to attach a magnetic label on the medium side, the effect of being able to be added to the conventional cartridge 42 is realized at low cost.

(Embodiment 16) In Embodiment 16, the disk cartridge described in Embodiment 15 is replaced with a tape cartridge. Specifically, VTR and DA
The magnetic recording layer 3 having the protective layer 50 described in FIG. 103 of the present invention is attached to the upper surface of the cartridge 42 of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 having a T or DCC rotary head type magnetic head or a fixed magnetic head.

FIG. 140 shows an overall block diagram. Since the basic configuration and principle are the same as those in FIG. 136, description of overlapping parts will be omitted.

The recording / reproducing apparatus 1 of FIG. 140 has an insertion port 394 of the cartridge 42 of the cassette of the VTR,
0 indicates a process in which the cassette 42 is being inserted in the direction of arrow 51. The perspective views of FIG. 141 and FIG. 142 when the cassette is inserted and taken out show a state when the cassette is attached and detached, and FIG. 143 shows a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head portion when the cassette is inserted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the cartridge 42 is inserted into the VTR, first, the optical sensor 386 records information such as a bar code provided on a part of the label portion 396 and a synchronizing signal. The optical sensor 386 reads the optical mark 387, data is reproduced by the optical reproducing circuit 38 of FIG. 140, and a synchronous clock signal is reproduced by the clock reproducing circuit 389. The above reproduction data is sent to the system control unit 10. If it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 is present, a head elevating command is sent and the head actuator 21 is moved by the head elevating unit 20 to the magnetic heads 8a, 8b.
To the magnetic recording layer 3. Thus, the data recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 is recorded on the magnetic heads 8a. 8b, the demodulator 3 of the first and second magnetic reproduction circuits 30a and 30b is detected.
The original data is demodulated by 41a and 341b. At this time, by using the synchronous clock signal of the clock reproducing circuit 38a at the time of demodulation, demodulation can be surely performed even if the traveling speed changes, so that the cartridge 42 is manually inserted and the traveling speed at the time of insertion is greatly increased. Even if it fluctuates, there is an effect that the data of the magnetic recording layer can be surely read. Further, by recording index information such as ID No. and software title on the optical mark 387, management for each cassette can be performed.

In this case, the magnetic head 8 basically operates by one, but two magnetic heads reproduce the same data.
By reading the data repeatedly, the reliability of reading the data is improved.
The synthesizing circuit 397 synthesizes the error-free portions of data 1 and data 2 to create complete error-free data,
This reproduction data including C data is the IC memory 3
Accumulated in 4. The TOC data includes the absolute address of the cartridge 42 at the end of the previous time and the absolute addresses of the start and end of each song and each segment. Therefore, the current absolute address of the tape at the time when the cartridge 42 is inserted can be known when the magnetic data is reproduced. Therefore, the contents of the absolute address counter 398 of the system control unit 10 are rewritten by the information of the absolute address.

Here, the case where the tape has music is described as an example. For example, the current address is 32 minutes per minute of the 8th song.
In seconds, it can be seen that the current absolute address is at 62 minutes 12 seconds. If you want to access the point at 42:26 of the absolute address of the 6th song, rewind the tape while referring to the data of the absolute address inspection head 399 by the amount of the absolute address of 19:46 seconds. Cue can be done at high speed. In this case, in order to know in advance how much tape will be rewound to reach the target point, by accelerating and decelerating at the highest rewind speed, the access speed can be significantly increased compared to the conventional method. Also, a list of TOC information can be displayed instantly when the tape is inserted. Therefore, the tape recorder can be made intelligent with VTR, DAT, and DCC. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), while the cartridge 42 is installed, magnetic recording / reproduction is arbitrarily performed, so that a new song is added or a recorded song is deleted. To do. In this case, the contents of the TOC must be changed each time, but in the case of the present invention, the TOC of the IC memory 34 is not rewritten as described repeatedly in many of the previous embodiments. Rewrite only the data. In this way, the content of the data is different from the old TOC data of the new TOC data magnetic recording layer 3 in the IC memory 34.

In this case, when the number of tracks on the magnetic recording layer 3 is 1, no device is required. However, when there are multiple tracks, for example, three tracks, by rewriting the data of only the track, for example, the second track, of which the TOC data needs to be rewritten, mistakes during recording are reduced. In this case, as shown in FIG. 137 (C),
When the cartridge 42 is taken out, only the third track is recorded by the magnetic head 8b.

This is completed for one head. Meanwhile, Figure 1
In the case of two heads such as 37, the signals 68 recorded by the magnetic head 8a are simultaneously read and an error check is performed. As shown in FIG. 139C, the magnetic signal 68a recorded by the magnetic head 8b can be verified by the magnetic head 8a. If there is an error, the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus 1 displays an error message on the display unit 16 and displays the message "Please insert the cassette into the main body again." At the same time, the operator is instructed to insert the cartridge 42 into the insertion portion 394 again. When inserted again, when ejecting,
Since the C data is recorded, the second time can be recorded with a high probability without error. When this is repeated many times, it is determined that the magnetic recording layer 3 of the cartridge 42 is destroyed, the ID No. of the optical mark 387 is recorded, and when the cartridge 42 of that ID No. is inserted again, The magnetic data is not read without issuing a command to lower the magnetic head 8. The tape of this ID No. is stored in the IC memory 34 while being backed up. In this way, surely record the TOC data for each cartridge 42 of the VTR tape,
Can be played. In the case of DAT, VTR, DCC, etc., TOC data cannot be instantly accessed because it is a tape medium. For this reason, there are problems that the contents list cannot be displayed and that the current song number cannot be known at the time of insertion. However, the present invention realizes the TOC function which does not require additional access time for a few parts. Since it suffices to attach a magnetic label to the cartridge side of the tape, it can be added to the existing cartridge 42 of the tape, and at the same time, the above effect can be realized at low cost.

(Embodiment 17) Embodiment 17 describes in detail a method of unlocking a specific program of an optical disk such as a CDROM in which a large number of programs each having a key such as Password are recorded. FIG. 147
As shown in FIG. 5, the optical mark portion 387 of the CD has a different ID No. for each disc. Is recorded. For example, the optical sensor 386 including the light emitting portion 386a and the light receiving portion 386b reads the data "204312001" and reads the data C
Disk of the key management table 404 in the PU memory
ID No. Put in (OPT). This method is usually sufficient, but the optical mark may be duplicated. In order to further enhance the anti-duplication effect, as described above, the high Hc portion 4 having an extremely high Hc such as 4000 Oe made of barium ferrite is used.
01 is provided, and the magnetic ID No. is set at the factory. (Mag) Data "205162" is magnetically recorded. Since this data can be reproduced by a normal magnetic head, the data can be reproduced, and the Disk ID No. of the key management table 404 can be reproduced. It is put in the item of (Mag). Here, the specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 148. In step 405, the program No. When the activation command of N is received, step 405a
Read to see if the program key information is recorded on the magnetic track. At this time, a recording current is passed through the magnetic head,
This data is erased. Hc for a regular disc
The key information cannot be deleted because it is high. The key information will be lost if the disc is invalid. Next, in step 405b, it is checked whether or not there is key data, that is, Password, and if No, in step 405c, a key input command is transmitted to the user as shown in the screen view of FIG. 170, and in step 405d, the user indicates, for example, "123456". Input it and check if it is correct in step 405e. If "No", stop in step 405f and display "Incorrect key or duplicate disk" on the screen. If Yes, proceed to step 405g and program no. The key data for opening N is recorded on the magnetic track of the recording medium 2, and step 405i is skipped.

Returning to step 405b, if Yes, in step 405h the program number. Read the key data of N,
In step 405i, the disc ID (OPT) of the optical recording layer
Read the disk ID (Mag) recorded in the magnetic recording layer in step 405j, and
Check if it is correct with 05k. If No, step 4
At 05m, "It is a duplicate disk" is displayed and it stops. Ye
If s, in step 405n the key data and disk ID (O
Decryption operation of PT) and disk ID (Mag) is performed to check whether the data is correct. Check at step 405p, if No, an error is displayed at step 405q, and if Yes, at step 405s the program No. is displayed. N
Start using.

When this system of the present invention is used, 120 CD-compressed voice-compressed songs can be inserted in a CD, and several hundred titles can be inserted in a game software so that 12 CDs or only one game can be heard first. Then, you can sell it at a price commensurate with the copyright fee for 12 songs or 1 game. Then, after the user pays the fee, the software company makes the disc ID No. By notifying the key corresponding to, it becomes possible to use software such as an additional song or an additional game as shown in FIG. 147. In this case, by adopting the voice expansion block 407, it is possible to store up to 120 pieces of music software in one CD because 370 minutes, which is five times as long as a CD, can be stored in one CD. be able to. Since the key data is recorded when the key is released once, there is an effect that it is not necessary to insert the key every time. The same effect can be obtained by using an electronic dictionary or a photo CD general program in addition to the music CD and the game CD. In addition, in order to reduce the cost, the ID No. of the high Hc unit 401. May be omitted.

(Embodiment 18) Embodiment 18 implements a copy guard function in the case of software that installs software on a specific plurality of personal computers such as an OS or a general personal computer program. 149 shows a block diagram, FIG.
Similar to 47. Describe the different points so that the explanations do not overlap. First, the optical mark portion 387 of the disc or the high Hc
The maximum number of personal computers in which this disc can be installed is recorded in the section 401, and this data contains the Disk ID No. of the key management table. (OPT) or Dis
k ID No. It is stored as (Mag) data.
For example, "ID = 204312001, N ₁ = 5, N ₂ =
It is stored as "3." This is "Disk ID is" 2040.
3121 "means that the maximum number of installed models of the first program is 5 and the maximum number of installed second programs is 3". As shown in the figure, when the program 1 is installed on the first personal computer “408 × 11”, five out of five tables in Program1 remain, so the key release decoder 406 sends data and the external interface A program such as an OS is installed in the hard disk 409 of the first personal computer 408 via the unit 14. At this time, the device ID of the personal computer 408
No. "XXXX11" is sent to the CDROM drive 1a, and this data is written in the key management table 404 Progr.
After being stored at a position n = 1 of am1, the data is recorded on the magnetic track 67 of the CDROM.

Next, using this CDROM 2a, "XXXXX"
When an OS or the like is to be installed on the second personal computer 408a of 23 ", the key management table 40 is similarly set.
Check 4. Then, you can see that you can still install 4 units, so the installation starts, and Prog
No. 2 of the personal computer which is "XXXXX23" in the n = 2 column of ram1. Is recorded on the magnetic track 67.
In this way, you can install up to 5 computers. However, if you try to install the OS etc. on the sixth personal computer, there will be no room in the column of Program1. Cannot be recorded and installation is prevented. In this way, unauthorized installation of software can be prevented because the software can be installed only on the number of computers paid for by the software maker. On the other hand, if the software on the computer that you have legally installed is broken and you need to reinstall it, the machine ID No. Is already registered as one for five, so it has the effect of being installed as many times as you like. Disk ID No. Also high H
Since the recording portion 401 of c and the optical mark 387 are recorded in two different processes, the cost and labor for the duplication are increased, and the duplication prevention effect is enhanced.

This method, that is, this program is shown in FIG.
This will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 410a, the program No. N installation instructions are issued. First, in step 410b, the machine ID No. For example, "XXXX11" is read. Next, the CDROM 2a is the CDROM drive 1
is set to a, the magnetic data is sent to the memory of the personal computer 408 in step 410c, and the key management table 4
04 is created. In step 410e, the program No. of this table is changed. Machine ID registered in the N column
No. Is read out and the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed is read in step 410f. If yes, the process proceeds to step 410q, and if No, at step 410g, the machine ID No.
Check if you can afford to register. Specifically, if 5 units can be installed, check how many units can be installed later. If No, the process goes to step 410n and the installation is naturally prevented, and the process stops at step 410P.
If Yes, in step 410h, the machine ID No. of the personal computer to be installed is set. Is registered in the table 404. Then, the number of remaining computers that can be installed decreases. In step 410c, this machine ID No. Is recorded on the magnetic track 67 by the magnetic head. If the installation is started in step 410j and succeeded in step 410k, the installation is stopped in step 410p. If it fails, the ID No. of the PC to be installed in step 410m. Is deleted from the magnetic track, and the process stops at step 410p.

(Example 19) In Example 18, the personal computer 4 was used.
Although the data exchange between the 08 and the CDROM drive 1a has been described, in the nineteenth embodiment, the configuration and operation of the interface between the personal computer and the CDROM drive will be described in detail. Except for the interface, it operates basically the same as a conventional computer. PC and C in Figure 151
PC 4 as shown in the block diagram of the DROM drive
An application 412 of a program such as WP software in the software unit 411 of 08 exchanges information with a kernel unit 414 that manages the system via a shell unit 413. This kernel unit 414 uses MSDOS. S
Narrowly defined OS 415 such as YS and IO. An input / output control system 416 such as SYS. Input / output control system 416
Has a device such as a hard disk and a device driver 417 for inputting and outputting the same. In the case of the figure, the external storage devices are four drivers A, B, C and D, 417a and 417, respectively.
b, 417c, 417d are logically defined, and usually RO
BIOS 419 composed of hardware containing software such as MIC and interface 4 such as SCSI
20 through personal computer and HDD 409, CDROM2
a, the interfaces 14 and 424 of the external storage device such as the FDD 426 are physically connected to each other to input and output data. The above operation is the same as the conventional method.
Also, the interface between the HDD 409 and the FDD 426 is the same as the conventional one.

By the way, in the case of the conventional CDROM drive and the optical disk drive, in the case of one physical drive,
Logically one drive is defined. However, in the case of the CDROM drive 1a having the magnetic recording unit of the present invention, the two drivers A, that is, the driver 418a and the B driver 418b are defined in the input / output control system 416. The driver A reproduces data of the logically defined optical recording file 421 via the interface 14 in the CDROM drive 1a, but does not record it. Physically, as described in the previous embodiment, the data on the optical recording layer 4 dedicated to reproduction on the optical disc is read by the optical reproducing unit 7, and the data is sent to the personal computer 408 via the driver A. Similarly, the driver B records / reproduces the data of the magnetic recording file 422 logically defined. Physically, data is recorded / reproduced on / from the magnetic recording layer 3 of the optical disc 2 by the magnetic recording / reproducing unit 9, and the driver B418b
As a personal computer 408 via the device driver 417
And input and output data.

In the case of this embodiment, one CDRO with RAM
Two drivers 417a, 4 for the M drive 1a
18b is defined. As a result, when the OS 415 multitasks, the personal computer 408 can record or reproduce the magnetic file 422 while reproducing the optical recording file 421.
As compared with the case of 1, there is an effect that the input / output processing of the file can be performed at high speed. Especially, the effect is high when a virtual file described later is used.

Next, a method of physically performing the above simultaneous processing will be described. The first method is described. First, in FIG. 152, RA
An optical address table 433 and a magnetic data table 434 of the M-attached CDROM 2a are shown. Since it is a CDROM, all the data in the optical address table 440 has a write-protect flag, while all the data in the magnetic address table 441 is writable unless otherwise specified. As described above, the CDROM drive 1a of the present invention is a CDR
When the OM 2a is inserted, frequently used data is read in advance in the drive memory 34a. Therefore, the addresses of necessary data in the magnetic address table 441 are arranged in the magnetic address table, for example, in the magnetic data 442 of the physical address 00 in the order of frequency of use. Therefore, when the disk is inserted, the magnetic data at address 00 is read out and transferred in the required data order to the drive memory 34a composed of an IC memory. As a result, when recording and reproducing the magnetic data of the CDROM, the drive memory 3 of the IC memory is physically
It suffices to access the data of 4a and record / reproduce it. Therefore, when the CPU of the system control unit IO simultaneously executes the time-division processing, the optical reproducing unit 7 can reproduce the optical data and at the same time, read and write the magnetic file 422 in the drive memory 34a. Therefore, the physical recording / reproducing of the magnetic recording layer 3 of the CDROM 2a is 1
Since it only needs to be rotated, damage to the recording surface is reduced. Drive memory 3
The contents of 4a are retained by the memory backup unit 433 even when the power of the CDROM drive 1a is turned off. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is ON or OFF, the CDROM
The changed magnetic recording data in the drive memory 34a is selected and recorded on the magnetic recording layer 3 only when the disc 2a is ejected, so that the number of recordings is a maximum of one from the insertion of the disc to the ejection and the life is extended. There is an effect. Parallel file processing is possible and transfer speed is increased. This drive memory a is stored in the CD by the memory backup unit 433.
The stored contents are retained even when the power of the ROM drive 1a is turned off. Therefore, even if the power is turned on again, it is not necessary to read the magnetic data of the CDROM unless the CDROM is replaced.

In this case, by providing the data compression / decompression unit 435 as described in FIG. 125 in the system control unit 10 of the CDROM drive 1a, the magnetic file 4
The substantial capacity of 22 can be increased.

Next, the case where the CDROM drive of the present invention is handled as one drive will be described. Since the operation is basically the same as in the case of two drives, duplicate description will be omitted.

In the input / output control system 416 of the personal computer 408, as shown in the block diagram of FIG.
The CD ROM with AM can be handled as one drive, for example, the A drive 418. In this case, the data of the CDROM drive with RAM 1a can be read and written even with a single task OS. The file structure is shown in FIG.
Like the address table of FIG. 2, the optical file 421 and the magnetic file 422 are provided with consecutive addresses and the optical data table 440 and the magnetic data table 441 are treated as one file. For example, as shown in FIG.
Data up to 1 "is assigned to the CDROM and all write-inhibit flags are set. Logical address" 01252 "
After that, magnetic data is assigned and a writable flag is set.

Then, when viewed from the personal computer side, optical data can be reproduced and magnetic data can be recorded / reproduced as if they were one disk. In this case as well, the logical address "0125
Since the address of the data frequently used for the magnetic data is recorded in 2 ", as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 9 and the data compression / decompression unit 435 to move to the magnetic file 422 of the drive memory 34a, it becomes unnecessary to physically read the data of the magnetic recording layer 3 thereafter.
Recording and reproduction of magnetic data are virtually performed by rewriting the data in the IC memory of the drive memory 34a. This is because the magnetic data can be stored in an IC memory having a small capacity because the magnetic data is as small as 32 KB. This extends the life of the disk and speeds up access and I / O. As described above, physical magnetic data is recorded only when the disc is ejected. The other operations are the same as those in the above-mentioned two-drive method, and therefore will be omitted. In the case of the 1-drive system, the system configuration becomes simple.

Next, a method for efficiently reproducing the data on the magnetic recording layer 3 and the data on the optical recording layer 4 will be described.
In order not to reduce the transfer speed of the CDROM, it is desirable to reproduce the magnetic recording layer during the reproduction time of the optical recording layer. Furthermore, it is most important to shorten the rise time when inserting the CDROM. First, the file structure of this embodiment will be described using the file structure address table of FIG. As shown in the figure, the CDROM 2a with a magnetic recording layer is composed of an optical file 421 and a small capacity magnetic file 422, each having an optical address table 440 and a separate physical optical address and magnetic address. Then, as shown in the cross-sectional view of the optical disc of FIG.
Magnetic drives 67a and 67 are provided on the backsides of B, C, D, E, and F.
b, 67c, 67d, 67d, 67e, 67f are arranged, and the magnetic addresses a, b, c, d, e, f correspond respectively. This correspondence is the magnetic TOC of magnetic address 00.
It is recorded in the section 442 together with the above-mentioned frequency management data. The system control unit 10 of FIG. 153 has a 1-address link table 443 indicating the physical positions of the optical address and the magnetic address in the drive memory 34a. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), link contents of two addresses are recorded in this content.

Now, a method of simultaneously reproducing the magnetic data and the optical data will be specifically described. When the CDROM is inserted and the minimum program is started, the minimum optical data is reproduced. It is sufficient to record the minimum magnetic data necessary for starting the program, for example, individual score data and progress data of the game software, on the magnetic track just behind the optical track of the optical data to be reproduced without fail.

This operation will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 156. An initial value of m = 0 is set in step 444a, and m = m + 1 is set in step 444b. In step 444c, it is confirmed whether m is the final value. If Yes, the process jumps to step 444m, and if No, the process proceeds to step 444d.
The optical data of the mth optical address A (m) is reproduced. Next, at step 444e, a subroutine for searching for an optical track corresponding to the magnetic track that is close to the optical address A (m) is entered. In this subroutine, n = 0 is set in step 444f, and n is set in step 444g.
= N + 1, check whether n is the final value in step 444w, and if Yes, jump to step 444m, and if “No”, in step 444h, the optical address M (n) on the back side of the nth magnetic address in step 444h is set. Read from address link table 443, step 444
At i, for example, M (n) +10 is checked to see if this optical address is in the vicinity. If No, the process returns to step 444g to check the optical address of the next magnetic track. If Yes, the magnetic head is moved down to the magnetic recording layer 3 in step 444j, the reproduction of the data of the magnetic address n and the fixing of the optical traverse are fixed during this period, and the step 44 is executed.
Check if the magnetic data reproduction is completed in 4k, and No
If so, step 444j is executed again, and if Yes, the process returns to step 444b, and the number of m is incremented by one again. Repeat the above work. However, if m is the completion value, jump to step 444m to check whether all the magnetic tracks containing magnetic data necessary for launching a program such as a game have been reproduced. If completed in step 444, step 444v Jumping to No., and if No, the reproduction subroutine 444p of the remaining n ₀ magnetic tracks is entered, and the remaining magnetic magnetic data is reproduced. Explaining this subroutine, n = 0 is set in step 444q and step 44 is executed.
In 4r, n = n + 1 is set, and in step 444s, it is checked whether n is completed. If Yes, jump to step 444v,
If No, the corresponding optical address of the nth magnetic address is accessed, and the magnetic data is reproduced in step 444u.
Returning to step 444r, n = n + 1 is set again, and the same operation is repeated unless completed. Step 4 when completed
At 44v, the operation of reproducing the initial rising data of the program is completed.

From this flow chart, the program startup time can be shortened by recording the minimum amount of magnetic data necessary for program startup, that is, ILP, on the magnetic track on the back side of the optical data optical track. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154, selecting the magnetic tracks on the back side of the various optical tracks in this way means that the magnetic tracks are not necessarily arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, by adopting the variable pitch magnetic track of the present invention described above, this program start-up time can be shortened.

Further, as shown by the magnetic TOC 442 of FIG. 154, by recording the optical address of the optical track on the back side of each magnetic track 01, 02 ... In the magnetic TOC,
A magnetic track with a free pitch can be set. By arranging the magnetic tracks in the order of use frequency, the frequency management data can be omitted, and the substantial capacity can be increased.

Example 20 In Example 20, this CD
A method of correcting a bag of a program of CDROM software using the ROM 1a will be disclosed. As shown in the data table of the file in FIG. 157 (b), C having a capacity of 540 MB
A bug correction program 455 is recorded in the optical file section 421 of the DROM 1a. A program such as an OS is recorded as ROM data in the remaining portion. The magnetic file 422 is about 32 KB in the present invention. Only bug correction data 446 having a small capacity is recorded here. No fix has been recorded. Figure 1
As shown at the bottom of 57 (b), the correction data, the correction contents, and the optical address of the optical ROM data to be corrected are entered.
As shown in FIG. 157 (c), only a specific file having a bug in the OS or the like is read into the memory 34, and the corrected data 448 is output by the bug correction program 447 and the bug correction data 46. A specific procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 157 (a). First, at step 445a, when a specific file having a bug is read, all the specific files are moved to the memory 34. Step 4
In step 45b, N = 0 is set, in step 445c, N is advanced by 1, and in step 45d, the Nth bug correction data of the specific file is read out, and in step 445e, it is checked whether or not the address is unchanged. If the correction is No, the line is deleted in step 445h, the logical address of the optical file is changed in step 445j, and the process proceeds to step 445k. If No, go to step 445k. In step 445k, check if you want to add a row,
If No, the process proceeds to step 445p. If Yes, lines are added at steps 445m and 445n to change the logical address of the optical file, and the process proceeds to step 445p. Step 445
In p, it is checked whether there is any other processing. If No, the process proceeds to step 445r. If Yes, another process is performed in step 445q. In step 445r, it is checked whether N reaches M and the correction is completed. And output the corrected specific file. In the case of the present embodiment, since the correction program is recorded in advance in the optical ROM section and the correction data is recorded in the magnetic file 422 at the time of shipment,
This has a great effect that bugs such as the OS can be corrected after the optical disc is manufactured. Further, the correction program is recorded in the optical ROM section. Therefore, a small magnetic file 4
It is only necessary to record the correction data in 22. Therefore, there is an effect that a larger amount of correction data can be recorded.

(Embodiment 21) Embodiment 21 describes a method of correcting bug data of a CDROM in real time when reading a file such as a dictionary. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), an optical ROM data correction table 446 is recorded in the magnetic file 422, and the corrected data corresponding to the optical address is recorded. As shown in FIG. 158 (c), the modification program 44 in the optical file 421.
7 and the correction data of the magnetic file 422, the respective data of the optical file 421 are corrected in real time and output as corrected data 448.

This flow will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 158 (a). File data modification program 447
Receives a specific optical data read command in step 447a, and sets N to the start number of the optical address of the data read in step 447b. The N in step 447c is incremented by one number, at step 447e reads the data of the optical address N in step 447d checks whether the k ₁ to k _M light address modification table 446. If No, go to step 447g; if Yes, go to step 447f.
Then, the data of the optical address N is corrected based on the correction table, and it is checked in the next step 44g whether all necessary optical data have been read. If No, the process returns to step 447c, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 447h to output the corrected optical data. In the case of the present embodiment, since the data is corrected and output in optical address units, there is an effect that the data is output in real time. Therefore, it is effective in the case of outputting data in small units such as dictionary CDROM software.
The CD of the present invention when each correction data is, for example, 10 B on average.
Since the ROM 1a has a magnetic recording area of about 32 KB, 3
It is possible to modify 000 places. Therefore the dictionary CDRO
Suitable for modifying M software, etc. In the case of a dictionary, by using the magnetic recording layer 3 for recording frequently used data or marking important data, a new function can be added, which is highly effective.

(Embodiment 22) In the embodiment described above, the method of substantially expanding the capacity of the data of the magnetic file 422 by a data compression / expansion program was disclosed.
In the twenty-second embodiment, focusing on the current situation where the hard disk 425 is standardized like a recent WINDOWS personal computer, a large capacity file is physically defined on the hard disk 425, and this large capacity file is logically stored in the magnetic file 422. A method of logically increasing the capacity of the magnetic file 422 by using the virtual memory method as described in 1. In this case, the basic configuration and operation are shown in FIG.
Since it is the same as the case of 1, the overlapping description will be omitted. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 159, the personal computer 408 with the machine ID = Ap, the CDROM drive 1a, and the disk ID
= A _H HDD 425, disc ID = B _H DD, and optical disc interchangeable optical disc 428 are physically connected via an interface. Also, magnetic file 42
2 is connectable to a personal computer 408a having a machine ID = Bp via an application program 412, a network OS 431, a network BIOS 436, a communication port 432, and a LAN network 437 such as TOPIP, and a disc ID = directly connected to the personal computer 408a. both hard disk 405a of C _D and has a possible connection. Therefore, the virtual large-capacity disk of the magnetic file 422 of this embodiment can be physically set in the hard disk 425 of the personal computer 408, the replacement disk 428, and the hard disk 425a of another personal computer 408a. Virtual disk 450, 450a,
It is referred to as 450b and is shown by a hatched portion in the drawing.

By using this virtual disk 450, for example, the capacity of the magnetic file 422 capable of recording only 32 kB per CDROM is virtually increased to 100 MB or 10 GB. HDDs are indispensable for WINDOWS personal computers in recent years, and most personal computers have network functions in the office. In this embodiment, a virtual large-capacity memory space can be obtained even if the CDROM 1a of most of the personal computer is inserted by using the free space of the hard disk of the personal computer and the network function.

Next, a specific data structure will be described with reference to the file data structure diagram of FIG.

The CDROM 1a comprises an optical file 421 that physically exists, a magnetic file 422, and a virtual file 450 that is logically defined. The actual data of the virtual file 450 is the HDD 425 or the exchangeable disk 4 shown in the figure.
28 and other personal computer 408a physical file HDD42
It is recorded in the physical file 451 in 5a. CD
The virtual file 4 is stored in the magnetic file portion 422 of the ROM 1a.
A virtual directory entry 452 including link information of 50 and the physical file 451 and directory information such as names and attributes of each virtual file is recorded. The virtual directory entry 452 is 1: address 438 in the magnetic file, 2: connection program number 453, 3 that contains the number of the communication program that contains the command to connect to another personal computer via LAN; The machine ID No. of the personal computer or drive to which the disk containing the physical file 451 is connected. With the machine ID number 454, 4: the disk ID 455 with the ID number of the disk with the physical file 451, 5: the file name 456 of the virtual file 450, 6: the extension 457,
7: Attribute 458 indicating the type of virtual file, 8: Reserved area 459, 9: Change time 46 indicating the change date and time of the file
0: 10: Start cluster number 461 indicating the cluster number at which the file starts, 11: attribute data of 11 items of file size 462. Of these items, items 5 to 11 are almost the same as the directory used for os such as MSDOS and are usually composed of 32 bytes. All items are 48 to 64 bytes.

Now, as shown in the magnetic file table 422a, the magnetic file 422 contains the virtual directory entries 452 for the number of virtual files. In FIG. 160, items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 are related to the drawing.
It is only displaying.

First virtual directory entry 4
52a is "A _N " in the connection program number 453 of item 2
Is included. Next, looking at the secondary machine ID No. 454 in item 3, the machine ID containing the physical file 451 is A
It turns out that it is p. In the case of the figure, since the CDROM 1a is connected to the CDROM drive of the personal computer with the machine ID = Ap, it is not necessary to activate the connection program A _N for connecting the LAN to access the disc of another personal computer. If the main machine ID 454 is another personal computer, start the connection program A _N
It connects to the personal computer of the LAN address of 454, and makes the disk 425a access. Since almost all the directory information is recorded in the link data 452, it is not necessary to access the physical file 451 when viewing the directory on the personal computer side, and the virtual file 450
You only need to access the physical file when reading or writing the data. Therefore, the link data 452 has an effect of reducing physical file access.

In this way, when the physical file 451 is reached, the sub-virtual directory entry 467 in the normal format is recorded in the physical file directory 463 as shown in the directory area table 465. Items 5-11 of items 1-11 of the main virtual directory entry 452 are recorded in this data. On the other hand, in the sub-reserved area 468 of item 8, the main disk ID of the original main CDROM side having the virtual file 450, the user ID 470 that sets the virtual file 450, the memorization number 471 of each file, and the final master that created the virtual file. Data such as the main machine ID 472 of the personal computer is added as compared with the virtual directory entry 452. This added data is recorded in order to confirm the relationship between the virtual file 450 and the physical file 451 from the physical file 451 side. If checked and the relationship is low, the OS does not allow writing. Further, in the attribute 458 of item 7, a reproduction-only code of “01H” in the case of MSDOM is recorded in order to prohibit normal writing unrelated to the virtual file 450. Therefore, recording is not possible in principle. When data is recorded in the virtual file 450, the CDRO of the virtual file 450 is stored in the input / output control system of the personal computer.
Information such as MID 469 and modified sub-460 is sent. It is checked that this data matches the sub file link data 467, and if it is OK, the IOS of the kernel section permits writing to the physical file 451, and the recording is executed. When data is added to "File A", the directory 463 of the physical file 451 is viewed, the contents of FAT466 are added like FAT466a, and the additional data of "File A" is physically recorded in a new data area. To do. In this case, since the file size becomes larger than that before recording, the data of the file size 462 of each of the virtual directory entry and the directory entry 467 of the physical file and the virtual file is rewritten to, for example, “5600 KB”.

In this way, the data of the physical file 451 corresponding to the virtual file 450 can be recorded / reproduced. All the work realized by this virtual file 450 is OS, input / output O
Since it is performed by the S and the network OS, from the user's point of view, the magnetic recording unit 3 of the CDROM 1a has, for example, 56
It can be handled as if a physical file of 00 KB exists.

Virtual directory entry 4 of about 48B
Virtual file 450 and several tens of KB from one data of 52
It becomes possible to physically record and reproduce data by linking the physical files 451 of several GB to several GB. Therefore, CDROM1
The capacity of the magnetic file 422 of the present invention associated with a is 32.
Even if only a small capacity of KB is obtained, 500 to 1000 virtual directories 452, that is, 500 to 1000 virtual files 450 can be virtually recorded and reproduced. One file having 10 MB has a remarkable effect that a virtual RAM disk capacity of about 5 GB can be obtained.

Now, a method for realizing a virtual file for CDROM will be described with reference to a flowchart. First, a method of reproducing a virtual file will be described using the virtual file reproduction routine flowchart of FIG.

At step 481a, the file "X"
Suppose you have received an order to call. In the next step 481b, it is checked whether the contents of the directory information are sufficient, and if Yes, the virtual directory entry in the magnetic file 422 is read, and in step 481d, the process shown in FIG.
Display character 496 on screen 495 of screen display diagram 64 (a)
As shown in a, only the directory contents such as file name or directory name, file size, creation date and time are displayed on the screen of the personal computer.

Here, the screen display will be described. FIG.
In (a), the display characters 495b and 495c are each 10
Still image file of MB Recordable virtual file 450 of moving image file of 1 GB is drive A, that is, CD with RAM
It is shown that it is logically present in the ROM 1a. It seems as if the operator has a large recordable file. Of course, the 540 MB CDROM file for reproduction and the like is also displayed in the display character 496d, and the display character 496e of "4 files in total" is also displayed. In this embodiment, the personal computer is equipped with a 20 GB hard disk. The virtual disk set capacity VMAX of the virtual disk for one CDROM 1a is recorded in the sub disk ID column of the default main machine ID 474 in FIG. Here, either the physical file capacity of the secondary disk ID or the virtual disk set capacity is the maximum capacity that can be recorded on the virtual disk. The remaining recording capacity is obtained by subtracting the current used capacity of the virtual file from this value. In the case of FIG. 164 (a), a virtual file having a total capacity of 10 GB is set, and a 1020 MB virtual file is consumed. 10,000MB-1020MB,
It is displayed on the screen that there is a virtual file 450 with a remaining capacity of 8980 MB. A virtual file is shown like a display character 496g. Since the symbol "V" is attached to the virtual file, it can be distinguished from other files.

Also, the personal computer screen view of FIG. 165 and FIG.
As shown in the block diagram of FIG.
The ROM part is displayed like the display character 496h, and the CD
In the RAM portion of the ROM, the ROM and the RAM are separately displayed like the display characters 496i and 496j, so that there is an effect that the operator can easily handle. Further, in the case of multitask processing, since the ROM section and the RAM section can be independently read and written simultaneously, there is also an effect that the processing speed becomes faster.
Now, return to step 481b in the flowchart of FIG. If No, the process proceeds to step 481e, the currently used machine ID No. and the virtual directory entry 45.
Check whether the main machine ID number 454 recorded in 2 is the same. If No, go to step 482a because there is no physical file in this personal computer, and if Yes, go to step 451f because there is a physical file 451 in this personal computer 408. Then, the drive name of the physical file is read from the secondary disk ID 455, and it is checked whether the drive is operating. If No, in step 481g, a display for instructing "power on of drive ID" is displayed on the screen, and in step 481h, it is checked whether or not the corresponding drive operates, and N
If it is o, the process stops at step 481i, and if it is Yes, the process proceeds to step 481j. In step 481j, it is checked whether or not the disk with the sub disk ID 455 exists, and if No, the process proceeds to step 481k, and it is judged whether or not it is a exchange medium such as a floppy disk or an optical disk by looking at the exchange medium identifier in the sub disk ID. If No, step 481n Display "Error" on the screen and stop. If Yes, in step 481m, a message "Insert disk" of the secondary disk ID 455 is displayed on the screen, and the process returns to step 481j. Return to step 481j, and if Yes, step 48
Proceeding to 1q, the directory area 465 of the disk having the secondary disk ID is checked to find the corresponding file name 456.
If it is No in step 481r, step 48
An error message is displayed with 1p. If yes, step 481s
Check the information in and check if it is really a physical file corresponding to a virtual file. Specifically, the data in the virtual directory entry 452 and the data in the directory entry 467 are collated. Also, the disc ID of the CDROM and the ID of the CDROM side main disc ID 469 in the directory entry 467 are collated. Also check the modification time and file size. Do not check attributes. In step 481t, it is checked whether all items to be collated are the same,
If No, an error message is displayed in step 481u, and if Yes, the reading of the physical data of the corresponding file "X" in the directory area 465 is started in step 481v. First,
After waiting for the start cluster number "YYY" of the FAT, a cluster number consecutive to "YYY" of the FAT is read out in step 481w, and necessary data among all the data of the above-mentioned cluster number in the data area is read out in step 481x. At the next step 481y, the reading of the file “X” is completed, and the virtual file 450 can obtain an arbitrary capacity value within the capacity of the hard disk of the personal computer 408.

Now, returning to step 481e, if there is no physical file corresponding to the virtual file in the hard disk of the current personal computer, jump to step 482a,
The connection with the personal computer with the main machine ID containing the physical file of the child is started. In this case, the connection routine 482 is handled by the network OS. First, the LAN address of the main machine ID is read from the item of the main machine ID of the virtual directory entry, the number of the connection program is read in step 482b, a predetermined network connection program is executed, the LAN address is input, and connection is tried. .
In step 482c, the connection is checked. If the connection fails (No), an error message is displayed in step 482d and the operation succeeds (Yes).
If s), the corresponding file read command is transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a via a network such as a LAN.

From step 482g, the sub personal computer 408 is started.
It becomes the OS work of a. First, File ”from the main computer
The data in the physical file is read in response to the read command "X", and this operation is exactly the same as the physical file data read subroutine 483 described above. Therefore, in step 483a, this subroutine 483a executes this Use Subroutine Step 48
The completion of reading the file is checked in 2h, and if Yes, the data of the file is advanced to step 482j, the data of the file "X" is transmitted to the main personal computer 408, and the operation proceeds to step 482k. If No, the process proceeds to step 482i, an error message is sent to the main personal computer, and the process similarly proceeds to step 482k.

In step 482k, the connection routine 4 for the network OS of the main personal computer 480 is again sent via the LAN.
82. In step 482k, the secondary personal computer 408
The data of the corresponding file or the error message from a is received, and it is checked in step 482m whether it is the error message. If Yes, an error message is displayed in step 482p, and if No, the process proceeds to step 482y, and the file reading operation is completed.

Next, open the flowchart of FIG. 162,
The procedure of the virtual file rewriting routine 485a will be described. As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the display character 496 appears on the screen. In step 485a, the user selects the specific file "
When a command for rewriting the data of "x" is issued, the virtual directory entry 452 of this specific file "x" is read in step 485b, and it is checked in step 485c whether or not this file has a password. As shown in the display character 496p in (a), "password? The operator inputs "123456" to the keyboard as indicated by the display character 496q, checks this number as a recitation number, and if No, displays "Error" on the screen in step 485e.

If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485g to check whether the physical file 451 exists in the computer of the personal computer. If the current machine ID and main machine ID 454
Check if it matches, and if Yes, step 485h.
If No, the process proceeds to step 486a in the connection routine 488 for connecting to another personal computer through the network.
If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485h of the physical file data rewrite subroutine 487, the drive name of the secondary machine ID in the virtual directory entry 452 is taken out, and it is checked whether the drive with this drive name exists in the personal computer. If “No”, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), “Please turn on the drive power” in step 485i.
The display character 496r of and is displayed on the screen, and step 485i
Check the existence of the corresponding drive with, and if "No", proceed to step 485j and display "Error" display character 456 on the screen.
issue s. If Yes, go to step 485k.
Next, in step 485k, the ID of the secondary disk of the driver
It is checked whether there is a disc with the same ID number as 455. If No, skip to step 485m to check the exchange medium attribute, and if Yes, go to step 485n and see FIG.
As shown in (d), "Please insert the exchange medium disk xx" is displayed and the process returns to step 485k. If No, it jumps to step 485j and displays "error".

If step 485k is Yes,
Directory area 46 in the disc with the secondary disc ID
5, the file name 456 is searched for and checked.
If No, the process jumps to step 485j to display an error.
If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485r to check whether this physical file is a virtual physical file.
Specifically, it is checked whether the contents of the virtual directory entry 452 and the data other than the attribute data of the directory entry 467 are the same. In particular, the disc ID of the CDROM on the client side and the CDROM side main disc ID 469 contained in the disc entry on the server side are collated.

If the check is made in step 485s and the result is No, step 485j is skipped and "error" is displayed. Yes
If so, proceed to step 485t, and the system such as OS is Fi
Attribute data “01” of the directory entry of lex
Temporarily erase write-protected clubs such as H "or" 02H "so that they can be stored.

Even if a user tries to view these files other than the virtual files of the CDROM, the files cannot be viewed because the "invisible code" is included, and of course they cannot be modified.

Thus, the virtual file is the corresponding CDR.
It is protected so that it can only be modified by OM and cannot be seen. In step 485u, it is checked whether or not the disk containing the physical file has free space. If No, the error display in step 485j is displayed. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 485v to read the data of the corresponding file in the directory and obtain the start cluster number. Then, in step 485w, the cluster number following this starting cluster number is obtained from the FAT area 466. In step 485x, the data in the data area 473 is rewritten in the entire data area of the corresponding cluster number. If the new data has a larger capacity than the old data, the data is also recorded in the new cluster. In this way, the data is actually recorded in the physical file 451. Check if completed in step 485y N
If o, the process returns to step 485x, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 485z, and the directory and FAT of the physical file 451 are first rewritten. At this time, the attribute of the directory entry 467 is "02H" invisible attribute (invisi
ble) again. Thus, as shown in the screen display diagram of the sub personal computer in FIG. 167, the substance of the physical file becomes invisible to the operator, so that the virtual file 450 of the CDROM 1a cannot be rewritten except by the OS. Therefore, there is an effect that data is prevented from being improperly rewritten. Data can be doubly protected by setting the above-mentioned password for each virtual file.

In step 486n, the data of the directory entry 467 is transferred to the virtual directory entry 452 of the magnetic file except the attribute data. In this way, the contents of both are exactly the same, including the date and time, so that writing to the physical file 451 is permitted by the collation work at the time of rewriting. The operation ends at step 486p.

Here, returning to step 485g, "N
When it is "o", jumping to step 486a, the routine 488 for connecting to the LAN is started.
Read N address. In step 486b, FIG.
As shown in the network connection diagram of No. 8, L of the main machine ID
Currently CDR to sub-computer 408a with AN address "A"
A plurality of program numbers are read from the LAN address "B" of the main personal computer 408 to which the OM 1a is attached via a network such as a LAN, and the LAN addresses are input to execute the connection programs one after another. If the connection is checked in step 486c and the connection can be made by any of the programs, the process proceeds to step 486e of Yes. If No, the process proceeds to step 486d to display an error. In step 486e, the rewriting command of the physical file 451 and the new data to be rewritten are transmitted to the sub personal computer 408a.

[0308] Next, proceeding to step 486f, from the OS of the main personal computer to the work of the network OS and the input / output control OS of the sub personal computer 408a. First, the rewriting command and rewriting data of the corresponding file are received. In the next step, the above-mentioned physical file data rewriting subroutine 487 is executed, and it is checked in step 486g whether the file data rewriting is successful. Then, the information of completion of rewriting to the main personal computer 408 and the latest data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file are transmitted to the main personal computer 408 via the network, and the network O of the main personal computer 408 is transmitted.
Skip to step 486j which is the work of S. Step 48
Returning to 6g, in the case of No, skip to step 486i, send an error message to the main personal computer 408 via the network, and perform the operation of the main personal computer, step 486i.
jump to j.

At step 486j, which is the operation of the network OS of the main personal computer 408, the data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 or the error message is received from the sub personal computer 408a, and step 4
If there is no error message at 86k, step 486
In n, the virtual file 45 of the magnetic file of the CDROM is based on the data such as the date of this directory entry 467.
The virtual directory entry 452 of 0 is rewritten so as to be the same, and the rewriting operation is completed in step 486p. Returning to step 486k, if there is an error message, proceed to 486m and display "error" on the screen.

Thus, as shown in the network connection diagram of FIG. 168, for example, 10 GB of the CDROM 2a with RAM is used.
In reality, the virtual file 450 of the present invention has only 32 KB of physical memory in the magnetic recording layer 3 of the optical disc 2, but a large-capacity file can be logically realized by using the virtual disc method of the present invention. .

[0311] In some cases, the HD of the main personal computer 408
The physical file 451 defined in D, and the physical file 4 of the HDD of the secondary personal computer 408a located at a remote place.
It may be 51.

The above is the description of the existing virtual file reproducing procedure and rewriting procedure. A method of newly creating a virtual file will be described using the flowchart of FIG. First, in step 491a, it is assumed that the user inputs a save command or user ID for a new file name "x" data file as shown in the screen display of FIG. 169 (a). The OS checks whether there is free space in the magnetic file 422, and if No, stops at step 491c.
If Yes, in step 491d, the default main machine ID 474 and secondary disk ID of the user ID are read out, and in step 491e, the default machine ID 474 and FIG.
The screen is displayed as shown in (a). If No, step 49
Ask the user to enter the default value changed in 1f and check again. If yes, go to step 491g,
Default main machine ID linked to virtual file
Then, it is checked whether the machine IDs in which the CDROMs are currently bundled are the same. If No, the process proceeds to step 492a of the network connection subroutine, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 491h of the file new registration subroutine 493. In step 491h, it is checked whether or not there is a disk with the default disk ID. If No, in step 491i it is checked whether the disk is a replaceable disk or data.
“Insert disk xx” like 69 (a)
Is displayed and the process returns to step 491k, it is checked whether the disk has a physical capacity for securing a physical file. If No, the message “Error” is displayed in step 491u, and if Yes, the process proceeds to the next step 491m, the data is recorded from the cluster start number xx in the free area of the data area 473 of the physical file, and it is checked in step 491n whether it is completed. If No, the error display of step 491u is displayed. If Yes, the FAT area 466 of the physical file is displayed.
And the directory area 465 are rewritten based on the recording file. At step 491q, the OS determines the attribute 4 of the directory entry 467 of FIG. 160 of the physical file.
An invisible attribute such as “02H” is recorded in 58. "01
H "write protection may be recorded. In this way, the input control OS treats only such a virtual file specially so that the file is linked to the virtual file to be recorded / reproduced. In the next step 491r, the main machine ID and password are recorded in the directory entry 467. In the next step 491s, the registration date and file name of the same contents as the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 are recorded. By recording unique information such as "etc." in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, when the virtual file is rewritten in the future, the collation with the physical file 451 can be surely performed, and the information can be mistakenly stored in another personal computer on the network. It is prevented to rewrite some other physical file 451. Step 4 Create a new file routine in 1t is completed.

Now, return to step 491g of the connection subroutine 488, and if No, proceed to step 492a.
LA of main machine of virtual directory entry 452
The N address is also read out, connected to the main personal computer via the network, the physical file 451 of the virtual file 450 is registered in the disk of the sub personal computer 408 using the file new registration subroutine 493, and the result is reported to the main personal computer. This step 492a to step 492
The flow up to j is the same as in the case of FIG. The new registration is confirmed in step 492i, the process proceeds to step 491s, the data of the directory entry 467 of the physical file 451 is recorded in the virtual directory entry 452 of the recording medium 2, and the new file registration is completed in step 491t.

Next, the recording medium 2 will be described. When the directory information is recorded on the magnetic recording layer in this way, if this data is destroyed, the virtual file will be destroyed. Therefore, in the case of applying to a CDROM or the like, the same virtual directory entry is recorded at two or three physically separated locations as shown in FIG. Separate tracks 67x and 6 to protect from the circular damage peculiar to discs such as CDs
Record at 7y and 67z. Further, in order to protect from scratches in the radial direction, by disposing the virtual directory entries 452x, 452y, and 452z on different angles θx, θy, and θz, it is possible to prevent destruction of directory information.

In recent years, the price / capacity of the HDD has dropped nearly 1000 times in 10 years, and the number of personal computers having a capacity of several to several tens GB is increasing. Focusing on this point, the system defines the physical file by utilizing the capacity of the HDD having sufficient capacity, and
RAM of optical disk 2 with a small capacity RAM of 32 KB
By logically defining a large-capacity virtual file in the area, the user can treat the ROM disk with optical RAM as if it has a large-capacity recording memory of several MB to several GB. There is such a remarkable effect. Further, almost 100% of recent business personal computers are connected to some LAN network. In recent years, the OS of personal computers also has a network function. Therefore, the optical disc 2
Virtual file 4 happens to appear on the main computer 408 in which the
Even if the physical file 451 on the server side corresponding to 50 does not exist, as shown in FIG. 168, the physical file 451 of the secondary personal computer 408a is automatically transmitted via this network.
This embodiment clarifies a method of accessing a and recording or reproducing data. By this method, there is a remarkable effect that the physical file of the virtual file can be accessed no matter which personal computer the optical recording medium 2 of the present invention is inserted into. Although the embodiments in which these methods are incorporated into the network OS and the output control OS are shown, they can also be realized by an application program.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having the optical recording surface, the magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording is performed in the RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus like the magneto-optical recording. By sharing the magnetic field head between the magnetic field modulations of the recording / reproducing apparatus, the number of parts and the cost are hardly increased,
Magnetic recording of information of independent channels provided on the recording medium can be performed. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing device side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at substantially the same price.

Also, the recorded recording medium is used as a music CD.
When applied to a hard disk, a HD, a game CDROM or an MDROM, and provided with a magnetic recording track on the back surface by a ROM type recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the block diagram of FIG. It is possible to obtain a remarkable effect such as returning to. Even when recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, when the gap width is 200 μm, several hundred bits are used.
You can record. This capacity meets the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. TO
If the track is limited to one track in the area C, the access means for the magnetic track is not required, and the system is simplified.

In a read-only recording / reproducing apparatus for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head section or the like on the opposite side of the recording medium facing the optical head. Since it can be shared with the magnetic field modulation head, the price can be reduced due to the effect of mass production. Originally, the cost is much lower than the magnetic recording component for low density, which is much lower than that of the optical recording component. No tracking mechanism is added because the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side are mechanically linked. Therefore, the cost does not increase.

Although tracking accuracy is not high by tracking the optical head according to the address information or the time information engraved on the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium, the tracking accuracy is not high. The magnetic head can be tracking-controlled at an arbitrary position. As a result, for consumer applications such as linear sensors and linear actuators found in floppy disks, it is possible to obtain the effect that no expensive parts need to be added.

The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is added to this material and spin coating is performed in this same step, and the number of manufacturing steps does not often increase. This increase in cost is of a negligible order from the overall cost perspective. Therefore, the new value of the magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost.

As described above, according to the present invention, since the magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost, the conventional RO
A RAM function can be added to an M-type optical disk or a ROM-only player.

The high Hc magnetic sheet of the present invention is attached to the label portion of an audio cassette such as DCC or VHS or a video cassette, the data recorded on the magnetic sheet is read by the magnetic head 8 at the time of cassette loading, When the data is stored in the IC memory and the data on the magnetic sheet needs to be updated, only the contents of the IC memory are updated while the cassette is being inserted, and only the updated data of the data stored in the IC memory when the cassette is taken out is stored in the cassette. By rewriting the data on the magnetic recording layer of the magnetic sheet with a fixed magnetic head provided at the outlet of the cassette, index information such as the address and TOC of the cassette tape can be recorded in the cassette independently of the tape. The effect is that information retrieval can be done instantly.

If the present invention is applied to a video game machine in which the display 44a and the keypad 450 are connected in the configuration of FIG. 180 and the illegal copy identification signal is not recorded in the magnetic recording layer 3, the illegal copy is not performed. There is an effect that the burned CD can be eliminated. Of course, since data such as game results, scores, user name, and environment setting data can be recorded / reproduced on / from the magnetic recording layer 3, the user can turn off the power or use another machine before using the previous The effect is that the game can be restarted from the middle of the game. Although the magnetic recording layer 3 is provided on the print surface side of the CD in FIG. 180, it may be provided on the transparent substrate side as described above. In this case, there is an effect that the size can be reduced.

(Embodiment 23) FIG. 181 shows a block diagram of a twenty-third embodiment. Example 23 will be described with reference to a recording / reproducing apparatus having a simple structure. In general, open the upper pig C
The CD player of the type in which a recording medium such as a D is put in and taken out has a simple structure and thus has a small number of parts. In the case of this method, the top view of FIGS. 182 (a) and (b) and FIGS.
As shown in the cross-sectional view of (e), when the upper lid 389 is opened or closed, the magnetic head is moved to the C position only when the upper lid 389 is closed.
It has been moved to D to facilitate the mounting of the CD. FIG.
In 2 (a), the upper lid 389 is in the "open" state. At this time, CD2 is not included. If the magnetic head 8 is present, not only can the CD 2 not be mounted, but if it is forcibly mounted, the magnetic head 8 will be destroyed. Therefore, when the upper lid is "opened", the magnetic head 8 is retracted below the magnetic head protection portion 501 provided outside the CD2.

Next, when the upper lid is "closed" with the CD 2 mounted, the magnetic head 8 and its suspension portion move in the direction of the arrow 51 in conjunction with the upper lid 389, and move onto the CD 2.

This procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 183 (a), when the upper lid 389 is closed in the direction of arrow 51a, the lid rotation shafts 393, 393a rotate, the head retractor 502 moves in the direction of arrow 51b, and the connected magnetic head 8 moves in the direction of arrow 51c. Moving. Thus, as shown in FIG. 183 (b), the magnetic head 8 and the slider 4 are
1 and the suspension 41a move onto the recording medium 2 such as a CD.

Next, as to the elevation of the magnetic head 8, FIG.
This will be described using (c) (d) (e). The optical head 6 reproduces the innermost track 65a such as TOC as shown in FIG. 183 (c), reads the media identifier 504 as shown in FIG.
If es, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), if the optical head 6 is moved inward from the innermost track, the head lifting link 5
The head lifter 505 is pushed by 03, and the magnetic head 8
Contacts the outermost magnetic track 67a to record or reproduce a magnetic recording signal.

In this case, the rotation servo control method is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5A, a servo signal area 505 is provided. At the time of manufacturing, a high Hc portion is applied as shown in FIG. 185 (b), and formatted at a factory etc. as shown in FIG. 185 (c).
Servo signal, sector information, unique media unique number 506 for each individual medium is recorded in the sync signal area 507 using a magnetic head capable of recording even a magnetic material having a strong Hc such as 2750 to 4000 Oe, in a factory or for exclusive use It is recorded by the machine. Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), a general magnetic portion 402 of Hc of 1600 to 2750 Oe having a slightly low Hc is applied. Figure 185 on it
The protective layer 50 shown in (e) is applied.

According to this method, since it is difficult to magnetically record the high Hc portion of the final medium even by itself, since the magnetic portion 402 and the protective layer 50 are on the upper side, it cannot be rewritten due to space loss. Therefore, the synchronization signal area 50
The media unique number 506 recorded in No. 7 cannot be rewritten, and there is an effect that the above-mentioned illegal copy prevention function is not broken.

The servo signal 505 and the address signal are
Recording / reproducing devices that are usually commercially available cannot perform recording / reproducing, and even if recording is mistaken, demagnetization does not occur. Therefore, under any use condition, the data in the sync signal area is almost completely protected after shipment from the factory, so that there is an effect that stable recording is realized.

Now, return to the description of the rotary servo of FIG. 183 (d). If there is an optical recording part inside the innermost circumference of the CD2, the rotation speed of the motor becomes constant by performing the normal rotation control of the CLV motor with the sync signal of the optical track, and magnetic recording / reproduction is performed. You can

However, when there is no optical recording portion inside the innermost circumference in accordance with the CD standard, the magnetic head 8 reproduces the servo signal 505 in the sync signal area 507 described with reference to FIG. The rotation servo signal reproducing unit 30c of 181 reproduces the rotation servo signal and sends the rotation servo signal to the motor drive circuit 26 to control the motor at a constant rotation speed. In this way, data is stably recorded / reproduced in the sectors requiring recording / reproduction in the data recording areas 508, 508a of the magnetic track 67a in FIG. 185.

Next, when recording / reproduction is completed, FIG. 183 (e)
By moving the optical head 6 to the outer peripheral portion as shown in FIG.
Moves in the upward direction of the arrow 51e and separates from the magnetic track 67a to prevent abrasion. Like this, traverse motor 2
3, the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a head lift actuator, and the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 186 (c), (d) and (e), the optical head 6 is forcibly moved to the outside of the outermost circumference by the traverse motor 23 as shown in FIG. 186 (d). In order to move the head elevating link 503 in the direction of arrow 51a, the magnetic head 8 is lowered in the direction of arrow 51b,
By contacting the magnetic track 67a, recording and reproduction of magnetic signals can be performed. At this time, if the magnetic noise of the optical head 6 interferes, the operation of the optical head actuator 18 is stopped. Further, when the operation is stopped or when the signal of the optical track cannot be reproduced by the medium, the drive current of the optical head is stopped, and the servo signal 505 of the magnetic track shown in FIG. Playback is performed by the playback unit 30c, and rotary servo is applied. This allows optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction to be temporally separated.
Therefore, the influence of noise from the optical head on the magnetic reproduction is eliminated, and the effect of magnetic reproduction with a low error rate can be added.

The system of the twenty-third embodiment can be used for a plurality of magnetic track systems and one track, but as described in the other embodiment, the one-track system does not require head access. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the device is simplified. Further, in the case of one track at the outermost circumference, there is an effect that the capacity becomes large.

In the embodiment of the multi-track system described with reference to FIG. 1 and the like, magnetic noise from the optical head 6 to the magnetic head 8 occurs during magnetic reproduction as shown in FIG. 116, increasing the error rate. . In this case, as already mentioned,
As shown in FIG. 187, by providing a sync signal area 507 in a sector and using a medium in which a magnetic servo signal 505 is recorded by a factory or a formatter, the servo by the optical signal is switched to the servo by the magnetic signal at the time of magnetic reproduction and the optical head 6 Drive current can be stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that noise from the optical head can be blocked.

Next, a method of applying rotary servo with an optical servo signal without using a magnetic servo signal will be described with reference to FIGS.
It will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of (f).

FIG. 188 (a) shows the state at t = 0. The optical head 6 is located on the outer peripheral track of the TOC track 65a. At t = t ₁ in FIG. 188 (b), the optical head 6 reads the TOC track 65a, and the media identifier 504 indicates the TOC subcode or the audio track in FIG. 184 (b) as shown in FIG. 184 (c). Subcode part and Figure 184
Search from the first track of the CDROM of (a).
At this time, since the head lifting link 503 is moved from the dotted line A to the dotted line B position by the optical head 6, the mechanical delay device 50 is
The switch 511 of 9 is turned on. However, the delay time t
_The head lifting link 503a does not operate until it reaches _D. Then, the reproduction of the TOC data is completed at t = t ₂ in FIG. 184 (c). Since this time is a fraction of a second, when the delay time t _D > t ₂ is set, the magnetic head 8 does not go down. When there is no media identifier, that is, when it is OFF, t
_D > t ₃ . In FIG. 188 (d) at t = t ₃ , the optical head 6 moves in the direction of arrow 51d and the head elevating link 503 stops pressing the switch 511, so the head does not descend.

When there is a media identifier, there is always a magnetic track 67a. That is, when ON, t ₄ > t _{D such} that t =
At t ₄ , as shown in FIG. 188 (e), the switch 5
Since 11 is pressed for a set delay time t _D or more, the output of the mechanical delay device 509 is activated, the head elevating link 503a pushes down the support portion including the suspension of the magnetic head 8 in the direction of arrow 51e, and the magnetic head moves to the magnetic track. 67a
Contact At this time, since the optical head 6 is reproducing the optical track 65a such as TOC, the optical servo signal is reproduced, and the motor 17 is CL by the optical servo signal.
It rotates at a constant rotation speed at V. Therefore, the magnetic signal is reproduced in synchronization with the synchronization signal of the optical reproduction signal. in this case,
Since it is possible to apply the rotary servo with the magnetic reproduction and the optical reproduction signal at the same time, it is not necessary to add a separate structure of the rotary servo, and there is an effect that the structure of the medium and the device is simplified. In this case, from FIG. 181, the rotation servo signal reproducing unit 3
0c can be omitted.

When the reproduction or recording of the magnetic signal is completed, the system control unit 10 of FIG. 181 sends a signal to the traverse movement circuit 24a to move the optical head 6 in the direction of arrow 51f, and the switch of the mechanical delay device 509 is switched. 511 is released, and at the time t = t ₅ after the delay time t _DS shorter than t _D has elapsed, the head elevating link 503a rises in the upward direction of the arrow 51g and the magnetic head 8 moves as shown in FIG. 188 (f).
Goes up and is released from contact with the magnetic track 67a. Thus, the magnetic head can be moved up and down with a simpler configuration, and optical reproduction and magnetic reproduction can be performed at the same time.

[0341] Further, as shown in FIG. 185, in the case of using a plurality of magnetic tracks 67, as shown in cross-sectional view of the medium of FIG. 189 (a), first, the magnetic track width T _WH of the magnetic head 8 The width T _{W of the} track 67a is made larger by the amount of eccentricity. As a result, the recording head and the reproducing head can be shared. This is because by setting T _WH >> T _W , recording can be performed in all the tracks of the magnetic track 67a, and the previous recording section does not remain at all. Figure 1 with multiple tracks
By providing the magnetic layer separately as in 89 (a), the recording / reproducing head can be shared.

In the case of the multi-track system, setting the track pitch T _P is important. In the case of the CD standard, an error Δr of ± 0.2 mm in the radial direction between the position of the optical track 65 and the center of the circle of the CD is allowed. Under ideal conditions,
As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the magnetic track 67a is arranged on the back side of the specific optical track 65a, and the magnetic track can be accurately accessed by the optical address. But,
In reality, in the worst condition, the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are displaced by + Δr as shown in FIG. 189 (b), or in the opposite worst condition, as shown in FIG. 189 (c), -Δ.
Two states can be considered when the optical track 65a and the magnetic track 67a are displaced by r. In order for the magnetic head 8 to not accidentally access the adjacent magnetic track 67b, it is necessary to satisfy r-Δr-T _WH / 2> r + Δr + T _WH / 2-T _P , and T _P > 2Δr + T _WH Becomes

In the case of a CD, since Δr = 0.2 mm, T _P > 0.4 mm, that is, it is necessary to set the track pitch wider by 0.4 mm or more.

By separating the magnetic layers as shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and 189 (a) and recording a magnetic servo signal by using a single magnetic head, the system is set as shown in FIG. The effect is that the configuration is simple.

In addition, FIG. 183 (c) (d) of this embodiment.
The method of raising and lowering the magnetic head 8 by using the traverse motor 23 described in (e) is used even when the optical head 6 and the magnetic head 8 are on the same surface side with respect to the medium as shown in the transverse sectional view of FIG. Applicable. When the identifier is determined from the state of the TOC track 67a in FIG. 191 (c),
The optical head 6 moves in the direction of arrow 51a to the state of FIG. 191 (d), the head elevating link 503 moves in the same direction,
The magnetic head 8 is lifted up in the direction of the arrow 51b to contact the magnetic track 67a provided on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side to perform magnetic recording / reproduction. At this time, the optical head reproduces the optical servo signal by the optical track provided on the inner peripheral portion to apply the rotary servo, or performs the rotary servo with the magnetic servo signal previously provided on the magnetic track 67a to rotate at low speed. .

After the magnetic recording is completed, the optical head 6 is moved to the position shown in FIG.
As shown in (e), the magnetic head 8 is moved to the outer peripheral portion, and the magnetic head 8 is lowered and released from the contact.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 192 (c) to 192 (d), the optical head 6 moves to the outside of the outermost peripheral portion in the direction of arrow 51a, so that the magnetic head 8 is lifted up to the direction of arrow 51b and is moved to the magnetic track 67a. You can also contact them. Since the operation is almost the same as that of FIG. 186, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, by providing the magnetic recording track 67a on the outer peripheral portion on the optical recording surface side, even if the magnetic head 8 is provided on the same side as the optical head 6, the traverse motor 2
With 3, the magnetic head 8 can be moved up and down, and the number of parts can be reduced.
When the same surface type is used for an upper pig type CD player or the like, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), when the upper lid 389 is open and the CD 2 is not mounted, the magnetic head 8
Then, the suspension 41a is exposed to the outside. Unlike the optical pick 6, these will break if you touch them with your hands. In order to avoid this, when the upper lid 389 is open, the magnetic head shutter 512 covers the upper portion of the magnetic head 8. When the CD 2 is mounted and the upper lid 389 is closed, the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of arrow 51a to expose the magnetic head 8. This operation is shown in Figure 1.
The upper pig 389 will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of 91 (a).
As is closed in the direction of arrow 51, the lid rotation shaft 393 rotates in the direction of arrow 51d, the magnetic head shutter 512 moves in the direction of arrow 51e, and the magnetic head window 513 opens as shown in FIG. 8 can be lifted and lowered. The same applies to the cases of FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b). By providing the magnetic head shutter 512, it is possible to reliably prevent the magnetic head 8 and the suspension 41a, which are weak against external force, from being inadvertently broken by the operator's finger or the like.

Next, as shown in the top views of FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), when the traverse positions of the magnetic head 8 and the optical head 6 are separated from each other, there is no problem, but the traverse movement range is designed. When it is necessary to provide the magnetic head 8, a spring 514 is attached to the magnetic head portion 8 as shown in FIG. 194 (e).
Is provided, the magnetic head 8 is pushed by the optical head 6 in the direction of the arrow 51a and retracted to the outside only when the optical head 6 reproduces the outermost optical track 65a, so that the access range of the optical head 6 can be secured. effective. This is particularly effective when reproducing a medium such as a CD in which the magnetic recording track 67a is not provided on the optical recording surface side, because it is necessary to access the outermost optical track. Next, when the optical head and the magnetic head are arranged on different sides of the medium, the magnetic field from the magnet may be large depending on the design of the optical head 6. Figure 195 shows "SANY
It is the measured data of the magnetic field in the optical recording layer portion of the CD of the O "CD ROM optical pickup. 40 when there is no magnetic head
0 gauss, 800 gauss when the magnetic head 8 faces each other. Therefore, if the Hc of the medium is low, the magnetically recorded data may be erased. As a countermeasure, first, while increasing Hc to 1500 Oersted as in the present invention,
When using such an optical head, the magnetic heads 8 should not be opposed to each other as much as possible. Therefore, FIG.
As shown in (c), the magnetic head retracting link 515 is moved in association with the traverse so that the magnetic head 8 is pushed to the outside of the recording medium 2 when the optical head 6 accesses the outer optical track 65a. As a result, the concentration of magnetic flux by the magnetic head 8 can be avoided, and the destruction of magnetic recording data can be prevented.

[0350] Not only the magnetic field of the DC from such an optical head 6, an alternating magnetic noise as shown in FIG. 116, the optical head 6 containing an optical head actuator, as shown in FIG. 197 L _H only By providing the magnetic head 8 at a distance or more, it is possible to obtain an effect that the interference of direct current and alternating current noise from the optical head 6 can be prevented. As this L _{H, if} it is separated from FIG.
It can be seen that it is necessary to separate them by 0 mm or more.

Next, in the case of the 1-track system, the structure is simple, but even if the outermost track is used, the diameter of the CD is 12 cm, and since there is no cartridge, high Hc
Considering the space loss, it is possible to secure the recording capacity of only a few KB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the multi-track head 8 in which the track 67a is divided into three is used, the capacity is tripled. Considering the eccentricity of the CD, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the azimuth heads 8a, 8b, 8c are shown.
By using the magnetic head 8 having three azimuth angles, the track density can be tripled. A track pitch T _P of 0.4 mm + track width is required for a non-azimuth head, but 0.13 m for an azimuth head.
It can be filled up to m + track width. Fig. 198 (c) (d)
Azimuth heads 8a and 8b with two azimuth angles as shown in
Is used to obtain twice the capacity.

Next, a method of recording the media identifier in the TOC section will be described. An optical track 65 as shown in FIG. 199 (b) is added to the TOC part of the top view of the medium of FIG. 199 (a).
New information can be recorded in the TOC portion by wobbling and wobbling and recording a signal as shown by a, 65b, 65c, and 65d. As shown in FIG. 200, by providing the wobbling signal demodulator 38c in the optical reproducing section, this wobbling signal can be reproduced. By this method, since information such as a media identifier can be recorded in the TOC, the media can be identified only by playing the TOC, and a new effect that a song title and a title name can also be recorded in the TOC is produced.

Although the method of raising and lowering the magnetic head by using the traverse motor 23 has been described, the head can be raised and lowered by using the loading motor 516 in the tray type CD player as shown in FIG. Figure 201
In (a), the loading motor 516 rotates, the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of arrow 51a, and loading of the tray 520 starts. In FIG. 201B, the tray 520 is stored and the micro switch 521 is stored.
When is pressed, the motor stops and CD playback starts.
When the media identifier is present, the motor 516 further rotates in the direction of the arrow 51g, the tray moving gear 518 further advances in the direction of the arrow 51b, and the head lifting link 503 is rotated to move the head lifter 519 as shown in FIG. 201 (c). The head 8 is pushed up in the direction of the arrow 51c to move the head 8 to the magnetic track 67.
The magnetic recording / reproduction is performed by contacting a. When the magnetic recording / reproduction is completed, the motor 516 rotates in the opposite direction, and the tray moving gear 518 moves in the direction of the arrow 51d.
The head lift 519 rises in the direction of the arrow 51e, the magnetic head 8 is released from the contact of the magnetic track 67a, and normal optical reproduction is performed. As described above, the magnetic data is stored in the memory section 34 of the IC memory, and the data is updated using the data in this memory section 34. Then, just before the tray is ejected, only the updated data is actually magnetically recorded and reproduced, and the magnetically recorded data can be updated.

(Embodiment 24) FIG. 221 is a perspective view of an information recording medium 1111 of this embodiment. In this figure, a recording medium 1111 is a substrate 1108 and a light reflection film 110 from the bottom.
7. A magnetic recording layer 1112 including a protective layer 1106 for protecting the light reflection film 1107, a magnetic layer 1105, a concealing layer 1103, a print layer 1102, and a print protective layer 1101 for protecting the print layer 1102.

The optical recording portion of the information recording medium 1111 is a CD.
The case of a ROM will be described. A CDROM is manufactured by providing a protective layer 1106 made of a photo-curing resin formed by spin coating or the like after vapor-depositing a light-reflecting film 1107 on a pit forming surface opposite to the optical recording surface 1114 of a molded substrate 1108 made of polycarbonate. To do. A magnetic layer 1105 and a hiding layer 1103 are provided on the protective layer 1106. A printing area 1110 for printing 1109 such as a label of a CD title or the like is provided on the concealment layer, and a printing area 1109 is printed on the printing area 1110.
A transparent print protection layer 1101 is provided to protect the above. By doing so, almost the entire one surface can be used as the printing area 1110. The magnetic head is in contact with the print protection layer 1101, and the print protection layer 1101 and the print layer 110
2. A magnetic signal is recorded on the magnetic layer through the hiding layer 1103.

Each layer will be described showing the manufacturing method. A polycarbonate substrate 1108 is manufactured by an injection molding method using a die, an aluminum alloy is vapor-deposited or sputtered on the pit molding surface to form a light reflection film 1107, and a protective layer 1106 of a photocurable resin is spun on the light reflection film 1107. Ordinary CD that is formed with a coat to make the CDROM part
It is similar to the ROM manufacturing method.

The structure and manufacturing method of the magnetic recording layer 1112 on the CDROM will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 22
2- (a) is a schematic diagram showing a process of forming the magnetic layer 1105. The magnetic layer 1105 is formed by applying magnetic powder dispersed in resin, but in the present invention, the magnetic layer 110 is formed.
5 is away from the magnetic head, the thickness of the magnetic layer 1105 is increased to secure an output signal, or the magnetic layer 1105 is thickened.
It is necessary to increase the residual magnetic flux amount. In other words,
The magnetic layer 1105 having a large amount of residual magnetic flux can reduce the thickness of the magnetic layer 1105. Further, in order to improve the overwrite characteristics of recording, the magnetic layer 11
It is necessary to reduce the thickness of 05 or reduce the coercive force of the magnetic layer 1105. However, in order to protect the magnetic information of the information recording medium 1111 against the living magnetic field, the magnetic layer 11
The coercive force of 05 should be 1200 Oe or more. From the above, in this embodiment, the output signal is secured,
Needle-like magnetic fine powder containing metallic iron as the main component (coercive force: 1
950 Oe, saturation magnetization: 143 emu / g, BET specific surface area: 56 m ² / g). As the resin used for the magnetic layer 1105, a mixture of two kinds of resins of vinyl chloride type and polyurethane type was used, but any type may be used as long as it has good adhesiveness to the protective layer 1106 and dispersibility of magnetic powder. Magnetic layer 11
The resin used in No. 05 may also be cured by heat or light, but within the working temperature range the magnetic layer 1105
If does not flow, it does not need to be cured. The magnetic layer coating material used in this example was prepared by mixing and dispersing the following composition for 3 hours in a sand mill.

Needle-like magnetic fine powder Metal magnetic powder 100 parts by weight Carbon black 6 parts by weight Alumina 15 parts by weight MR-110 (manufactured by Zeon Corporation) 15 parts by weight Polyurethane resin 15 parts by weight Oleyl oleate 5 parts by weight MEK 270 parts by weight Toluene 270 parts by weight Cyclohexanone 90 parts by weight This magnetic paint is uniformly applied on the protective layer 1106 by an airless spray coating method to a dry thickness of 2.5 μm to form a magnetic layer 1105. The airless spray coating method is a method in which pressure is directly applied to the paint by a pressure pump 1119, and the paint is atomized through a nozzle 1120 to form a magnetic paint layer on the protective layer 1106. The paint used has a low viscosity and does not contain a volatile solvent. It has the advantage that it can be used and thin layer coating is possible.

FIG. 222- (b) is a schematic view showing a forming process of the aluminum alloy thin film layer 1104 of the concealing layer 1103. The hiding layer 1103 hides the color of the magnetic layer 1105,
02 is a base layer for displaying clearly. Magnetic layer 11
In order to sufficiently conceal 05, the concealing layer 1103 should have a sufficient thickness, but the sufficient thickness cannot be obtained because it is necessary to reduce the distance between the magnetic layer 1105 and the magnetic head. If the thickness of the concealing layer 1103 is 0.2 μm or more from the wavelength of light, the concealing property will be exhibited.
The color tone of 5 cannot be erased. In this embodiment, the hiding layer 1
103 is an aluminum alloy thin film layer 1104 and a hiding coating layer 111
It consists of 3. The aluminum alloy thin film layer 1104 has a function of reflecting light on the surface of the magnetic layer 1105 and reducing light absorbed by the magnetic layer 1105. Aluminum alloy thin film layer 1
104 is formed by a method in which an aluminum alloy contained in a crucible 1122 in a vacuum chamber 1121 is heated by supplying a current from a power source 1124 to a heater 1123, and the generated aluminum alloy vapor is vapor-deposited on a magnetic layer 1105. In this example, vapor deposition was performed under the condition that the thickness of the aluminum alloy thin film layer 1104 was 0.2 μm.

FIG. 222- (c) is a schematic view showing a process of forming the concealing coating film layer 1113 of the concealing layer 1103. A white pigment needs to be used for the concealing coating layer 1113 when full-color printing is performed thereon, but a coloring pigment may be used. As the coating material for the hiding layer used in this example, titanium oxide powder (particle size: 0.28 μm) was used and mixed and dispersed by a ball mill for 70 hours with the following composition, and desmodur L (manufactured by DuPont) as a curing agent immediately before coating. Was added by 3 parts by weight.

Titanium oxide powder 100 parts by weight Alumina 8 parts by weight Polyurethane resin 15 parts by weight Oleic acid 2 parts by weight Stearic acid 2 parts by weight MEK 120 parts by weight Toluene 120 parts by weight Cyclohexanone 40 parts by weight An aluminum alloy thin film layer 1104 On top of the air
Uniform coating is performed by a spray coating method so as to have a dry thickness of 2 μm to form a concealing coating layer 1113.

Next, a label such as a CD title is printed on the concealment layer 1103. As a printing method, in the case of full color, four-color printing may be performed by a normal offset printing method, and when there is no color overlap, a screen printing method may be used.
In this example, full-color printing was performed by the offset printing method. Since the offset printing method is a normal printing method, detailed description thereof will not be given, but FIG. 222- (d) shows a cross-sectional view of the information recording medium 1111 after title printing. In this embodiment, the maximum thickness of the print 1109 is 4 μm.
Met.

Finally, the formation of the print protection layer 1101 will be described. The print protection layer 1101 serves to protect the print layer 1102 and the concealment layer 1103 from abrasion by the magnetic head and to prevent dirt and the like from adhering to the surface of the magnetic recording layer 1112. Therefore, the print protection layer 1101 needs water repellency and hardness. The hardness may be 5H or more by the pencil hardness method. A photocurable resin is a material that satisfies these conditions. Many photocurable resins satisfy hardness of 5H, but regarding water repellency, it is necessary to add a silicone-based or fluorine-based oil before coating. In this embodiment, a transparent coating material in which silicone oil is added to an ultraviolet curable resin to increase water repellency is used. The thickness of the print protection layer is 1.5 μ in consideration of running durability of the magnetic recording layer 1112.
You need more than m. The coating method includes an offset printing method similar to the printing 1109, an airless spray method similar to the magnetic layer 1105, and a screen printing method. In this embodiment, the offset printing method is applied to a thickness of 1.5 μm.
Irradiated with ultraviolet rays. FIG. 222- (e) is a sectional view of the information recording medium after the printing protective layer is applied.

(Example 25) Information recording medium 1 of this example
Since 111 has a structure similar to that of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the difference from the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.

The structure and manufacturing method of the magnetic recording layer 1112 on the CDROM will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 22
3- (a) is a schematic diagram showing a process of forming the magnetic layer 1105. The magnetic coating material 1128 has the same material composition as that of the first embodiment, and is screen-printed by the screen printing method.
Screen version 11 using 126 and squeegee 1127
A magnetic layer 1105 was formed by coating the protective layer 1106 through a mesh of 26 so that the dry film thickness was 3.5 μm.
The concealing layer 1103 and the printing layer 1102 were formed in the same manner as in Example 24.

In this example, the print protection layer 1102 was applied to the thickness of 5 μm by the screen printing method and was irradiated with ultraviolet rays. FIG. 223- (b) shows a sectional view of the information recording medium after the printing protective layer is applied. Information recording medium 111 of the present invention
In No. 1, the distance between the magnetic layer 1105 and the surface of the magnetic recording layer 1112 affects the output as spacing loss. The loss amount (dB) is represented by 54.6 (d / λ) [d: spacing (μm), λ: recording wavelength (μm)]. Print 11
Magnetic layer 1105 and magnetic recording layer 111
The distance fluctuation from the surface of 2.2 is 2.2 dB at a wavelength of 100 μm,
The output variation is 4.4 dB at the wavelength of 50 μm. This output fluctuation affects the recording / reproducing characteristics as modulation. Magnetic layer 110 to reduce modulation
5 and the surface of the magnetic recording layer 1112 need to be reduced. FIG. 223- (c) shows a schematic view of the surface polishing step of the print protective layer. In the present embodiment, the print protection layer 110
1 is applied excessively, and thereafter the information recording medium 1111 is rotated by the polishing tape 1125 while the print protection layer 1101 is rotated.
Was polished to change the distance from the magnetic layer 1105 to 18%.
After that, the polishing tape 1125 was replaced, and unevenness of Rmax 0.8 was formed on the surface. The unevenness reduces the contact area with the magnetic head and reduces the friction coefficient between the magnetic head and the information recording medium 1111 to improve running durability. FIG. 223- (d) shows a cross-sectional view of the print protection layer after surface polishing.

Example 26 Metal pure iron ferromagnetic fine powder (Hc: 1510 Oe, σs: 130 emu /) as a magnetic layer coating material
g, BET specific surface area: 49 m ² / g), and mixed and dispersed by a sand mill for 3 hours with the following composition, and 6 parts by weight of Desmodur L (manufactured by DuPont) as a curing agent was added immediately before coating.

Metal pure iron 100 parts by weight Carbon black 6 parts by weight Alumina 15 parts by weight MR-110 (manufactured by Zeon Corporation) 15 parts by weight Polyurethane resin 15 parts by weight Oleyl oleate 5 parts by weight MEK 120 parts by weight Toluene 120 parts by weight Cyclohexanone 40 parts by weight The magnetic layer coating composition is applied onto a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 62 μm by a die coating method so as to have a thickness of 2 μm, the orientation of the magnetic substance is removed by an alternating magnetic field, and after calender treatment, 60 Curing was carried out for 24 hours in an atmosphere of ° C. After curing, apply an acrylic thermoplastic resin to the surface of the PET film that is not coated with the magnetic layer with a dry thickness of 4 μm, and then have an inner diameter of 40 m so that it can be attached to a 12 cm CD.
A disc-shaped medium was prepared by punching out with an outer diameter of 117 mm with a die and heat-sealing it to the surface opposite to the light reading surface of a CD-ROM on which label printing was not performed. After that, a UV-curable ink was printed by a screen printing method on a portion of the magnetic layer that was not magnetically recorded to have a dry thickness of 100 μm, and UV-cured to obtain a sample.

The test for life scratches was carried out by uniformly laying 1 g of Kanto loam dust on a glass plate of 30 cm square and placing the sample with the magnetic layer on the lower side.
A load of g was applied, and the product was rotated 300 times and the scratches generated on the magnetic recording surface were visually observed.

For the recording frequency characteristic, a sendust bulk head (gap width 30 μm, track width 1.3 mm) was used, a rectangular wave of each frequency was recorded by changing the recording current, the output was taken, and the maximum value was output to that frequency. The frequency characteristic was taken as the value, and the linear recording density at which 80% of the maximum output value of the frequency characteristic was taken was D ₈₀ .

(Comparative Example 1) In the same manner as in Example 26, a sample without printing ultraviolet curable ink was prepared.

(Comparative Example 2) Titanium oxide powder (grain system: 0.28 μm) was used as a paint for the protective concealing layer, and the mixture was mixed and dispersed for 70 hours with a ball mill according to the following composition. (Manufactured by the company) was added.

Titanium oxide powder 100 parts by weight Alumina 8 parts by weight Polyurethane resin 15 parts by weight Oleic acid 2 parts by weight Stearic acid 2 parts by weight MEK 120 parts by weight Toluene 120 parts by weight Cyclohexanone 40 parts by weight Protecting the same magnetic layer paint as the example Layer paint thickness of 62μ
m polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film with a thickness of 2 μm and a thickness of 3 μm, which are simultaneously coated by a die coating method to remove the orientation of the magnetic substance by an AC magnetic field, and after calendering after drying, an atmosphere of 60 ° C. 24
It was cured over time. After curing, dry the acrylic thermoplastic resin on the surface of the PET film not coated with the magnetic layer to a thickness of 4 μm.
After coating with m, it is punched with a die to an inner diameter of 40 mm and an outer diameter of 117 mm so that it can be attached to a 12 cm CD, and heat-fused to the surface opposite to the optical reading surface of a CD-ROM without label printing to prepare a disk-shaped sample. did.

Table 1 compares the structure of Example 26 and the characteristics thereof with those of the comparative example.

[0375]

[Table 1]

As is clear from Table 1, the magnetic recording medium in which the portion used for magnetic recording is lower than the other portion due to the printing layer is a magnetic recording medium whose surface used for magnetic recording has the same height as other surfaces. Living scratches are less likely to occur than the medium, and D ₈₀ is longer than that of the magnetic recording medium having a protective concealing layer.

In this example, P having a magnetic recording layer was used.
Although the ET film is adhered to the disc having the optical recording / reproducing surface via the adhesive layer, the same effect can be obtained by using the method of transferring the magnetic recording layer via the adhesive layer. Further, the magnetic powder of the magnetic layer used in this example is metal pure iron,
Similar effects are exhibited by Co-γ iron oxide, γ iron oxide, hexagonal ferrite such as barium ferrite, iron nitride, iron carbide and the like. The resin used for the adhesive layer between the magnetic layer and the disc is not limited to the type used in this embodiment, but a general thermoplastic resin such as vinyl chloride-based, polyurethane-based, or epoxy-based resin or a thermosetting resin may be used. The effect is obtained. The same effect can be obtained by attaching the adhesive layer to the non-magnetic substrate in advance or by using a sheet resin.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the life damage resistance of the magnetic recording medium by using the structure in which at least the portion used for magnetic recording of the magnetic recording layer is lower than the other portions. Is obtained.

Example 27 The following experiment was conducted as a preliminary experiment. As magnetic powder, metal magnetic powder manufactured by Kanto Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd. (product number: MAP2000, BET specific surface area value =
55 square meters / g), and the binder resin is a polyurethane resin solution containing sulfonic acid groups manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd. (product number: UR-8530, solid content = 30 wt%, solvent MEK / toluene = 1/1). , Molecular weight Mw = 50,000)
It was used. As the dispersant, a commercially available reagent: p-toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate, molecular weight = 190.21, Nacalai Tesque, Inc.) was used.

The amount of monomolecular adsorption of p-toluenesulfonic acid on the metal magnetic powder was measured. As an experimental method, the following materials and dispersion beads were poured into a 500 ml polyethylene container, dispersed with a shaker for 1 hour, filtered with a Nutsche filter, dried by blowing air, and adsorbed with a dispersant from a thermogravimetric analysis curve. The amount was analyzed. 100g of this metal magnetic powder, organic solvent:
MEK was 300 g, the present dispersant: p-toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate) was 10 g, and 1 mm diameter zircon beads were 300 g as beads for dispersion.

The results were 2. for 100 parts by weight of magnetic powder.
It is 88 parts by weight, and this value is a single molecule calculated from the molecular cross-sectional area of the sulfonic acid group, the molecular weight of p-toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate), the BET specific surface area value of the metal magnetic powder, the Avogadro number, etc. It is almost the same as the adsorption amount. Therefore, for this metal magnetic powder, 2.88 wt% is the saturation value of adsorption, and when p-toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate) is actually poured into the metal magnetic powder, it becomes a gas (hydrogen gas). It was also confirmed that the present dispersant was adsorbed to the metal magnetic powder from the fact that it was generated.

The following experiment was conducted as a preliminary experiment. As an experimental method, the following materials and dispersion beads were poured into a 500 ml polyethylene container, dispersed with a shaker for 3 hours, filtered with a Nutsche filter, dried with air blowing, and subjected to thermogravimetric analysis based on a binder resin. The adsorbed amount of was analyzed. 100 g of this metal magnetic powder, 50 g of this binder-resin solution: polyurethane resin solution, mixed solvent (MEK / toluene = 1)
(1/1, weight ratio) was 137.5 g, and the bead for dispersion was 300 g of a 1 mm diameter zircon bead.

The result is 1 for 100 parts by weight of magnetic powder.
It is 0.44 parts by weight, and this value can be regarded as a reasonable value.

An experiment was conducted using the following materials for the preparation of the ink for the magnetic layer. Metal magnetic powder (Kanto Denka Kogyo's part number: MAP2000) ... 50
0 g dispersant (reagent; p-toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate) ..... organic solvent (MEK) shown in Fig. 228 ...・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
--- 1500g is mixed by high speed stirring with a disperser, the dispersant-treated metal magnetic powder is filtered using a large nutche and a suction filter bell, and excess MEK is blown off and sufficiently dried. It was

Next, a polyurethane resin solution (product number: UR-8530 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., solid content = 30 wt)
%) ............ After adding the components shown in FIG. 228, the mixture was kneaded with three rolls, diluted, and dispersed in a sand mill.

Further, by adding an organic solvent, MEK / toluene / cyclohexanone = 3/3/1 (weight ratio),
All paints were prepared at NV (wt% of non-volatile components in the paint) = 30.0. Each of the magnetic coatings obtained was printed on a CD (the side not exposed to the laser light) with a 400 mesh screen manufactured by Mesh Kogyo Co., Ltd., and a commercially available ultraviolet curable resin (large Nippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., product number: SSD White) is applied in the same manner and subjected to ultraviolet curing treatment, magnetic layer 4 μm, concealing layer (ultraviolet curing layer) 8
An information recording medium having a thickness of μm was manufactured. here,
As shown in FIG. 228, polyurethane and dispersant: p
-Sample coatings in which the amount ratio of toluenesulfonic acid (monohydrate) charged was changed were sample numbers 1 to 7.

The outputs of these information recording media were measured by a measuring device manufactured in-house. As the measurement conditions, the relative speed between the information recording medium and the head was 1.3 m / s, and the linear recording density was 60.
It was 0 BPI, and the track widths of Read / Write were both 200 μm. The result of relative comparison of the output decibel display values is shown in FIG. 228.

Here, it is assumed that the present dispersant adsorbs to the present magnetic powder as much as the charged amount up to 2.88 wt% of the saturated adsorption amount, and the adsorption rate (A) is A = charged weight part × 100 /
It is defined as 2.88 (%). The value of this adsorption rate (A) is also shown in FIG. 228. As shown in the results of FIG. 228, it is understood that the output reaches a maximum value with a small amount of addition (preparation) of the present dispersant.

As an interpretation of this, if the high molecular binder resin and the low molecular dispersant are adsorbed to the magnetic powder while maintaining an appropriate amount of relationship, the spread of the binder resin after adsorption becomes appropriate, and as a result, It is considered that the filling property of the magnetic powder in the coating film also reaches a maximum value. If the BET specific surface area of the magnetic powder changes, the value of the adsorption rate also changes primarily. Therefore, it is considered that this means that coexistence of a binder resin having a sulfonic acid group, which has a high adsorption ability, and a dispersant together in an appropriate ratio is effective.

Example 28 An experiment was conducted using the following materials also in the case of preparing the ink for the hiding layer.

The powder used in Example 1 was a masking powder of titanium oxide (manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., product number: R-580, particle size 0.2).
8 μm, BET specific surface area value = 7 square m / g) = 500 g
The other material compositions and film forming methods were the same, and the sample coating films were sample numbers 8 to 14. The gloss of the coating film is Nippon Denshoku Co., Ltd.
Gloss meter (product number: VG-1D, incident reflection angle 45 degrees)
And the results are shown in FIG. 229.

As shown in the results of FIG. 229, it can be seen that the glossiness reaches a maximum value with a small amount of the dispersant added (prepared). The interpretation is the same as in the case of magnetic powder. This is because the glossiness is considered to be a measure of hiding property, and the hiding property is considered to be a measure of high filling property.

By the way, although it is a dispersion preparation method of the magnetic coating material, in order to uniformly adsorb the dispersant to the metal magnetic powder having a high BET specific surface area value, as a pretreatment, a dispersant using an organic solvent as a wet method is used. Sufficient wet adsorption treatment is desirable. In this case, as the organic solvent, low boiling point, low toxicity, non-reactivity with magnetic powder and the like are preferable, and MEK is most useful among general-purpose organic solvents. Cyclohexanone reacts with metal magnetic powder, and toluene has a moderate boiling point and a considerable toxicity. In addition, p-toluenesulfonic acid as a dispersant is useful as an organic acid having a sulfonic acid group, and also has advantages such as low molecular weight, high adsorption retention, and solvent solubility.

(Example 29) Next, a case where an ultraviolet curable resin is used among the photocurable resins will be described.

First, the preparation of the magnetic layer ink will be described in detail below. Metal magnetic powder (Kanto Denka Kogyo KK,
Part number: MAP2000) ... 500g Alumina (Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., Part number: AKP-20, particle size 0.50 μm)
33. UV curable resin solution (epoxy acrylic type)
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ 100g Prepolymer: 47wt% Monomer: 40wt% Photopolymerization initiator: 5wt% Auxiliary agent: 5wt% Defoamer: 3wt% Organic solvent: Cyclohexanone ...・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ The above mixture shown in FIG.
After high-speed stirring with a disperser for premixing, the mixture was kneaded and dispersed with three rolls.

Similarly, in the preparation of the ink for the masking layer, only the metal magnetic powder was used as a masking powder of titanium oxide (manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., product number: R-580, particle size = 0.28 μ).
m, BET specific surface area value = 7 square m / g).

First, a single film of the magnetic layer was produced by screen printing using only the ink for the magnetic layer. Screening was performed with a mesh screen of 400 mesh manufactured by Mesh Kogyo Co., Ltd., and the print medium was a CD (surface not irradiated with laser beam) surface. A good coating film was obtained. It is most efficient in terms of electromagnetic conversion characteristics to subject this coating film to an ultraviolet curing treatment and place the head directly on it to perform magnetic recording / reproduction.

Here, the degree of vertical streaks on the coating surface due to squeegee was visually evaluated. The results for the coating films of sample numbers 15 to 18 are shown in FIG. 230.

As shown in FIG. 230, it was found that when the added amount of cyclohexanone as the organic solvent was large, the ink had a low viscosity and the leveling property was improved. next,
N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) as organic solvent
FIG. 231 shows the results when Sample No. was used (Sample No. 19-22).
Described in.

As shown in FIG. 231, NMP has a high boiling point (boiling point = 202 ° C.) as an organic solvent, and the drying becomes slow, so that the surface property of the coating film (visual observation) is more excellent. understood.

Next, after printing the magnetic layer ink (Sample No. 18) and the concealing layer ink (Sample Nos. 19-22) thereon, ultraviolet curing treatment was carried out to prepare an information recording medium.

This information recording medium (Sample No. 23-26)
The output of was measured with a measuring device manufactured in-house.

As the measurement conditions, the relative speed between the CD information recording medium and the head was 1.3 m / s, and the linear recording density was 6
The track width of Read / Write was set to 200 μm. The result of relative comparison of the output decibel display values is shown in FIG. 232.

(Embodiment 30) Next, a case where an ultraviolet curable resin is used among the photocurable resins will be described.

First, the preparation of the magnetic layer ink will be described in detail below. Metal magnetic powder (Kanto Denka Kogyo KK,
Part number: MAP2000) ... 500g Alumina (Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., Part number: AKP-20, particle size 0.50 μm)
33. UV curable resin solution (epoxy acrylic type)
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ 100g Prepolymer: 47wt% Monomer: 40wt% Photopolymerization initiator: 5wt% Auxiliary agent: 5wt% Defoamer: 3wt% Organic solvent: Cyclohexanone ...・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ The above mixture shown in FIG.
After high-speed stirring with a disperser for premixing, the mixture was kneaded and dispersed with three rolls.

Similarly, in the preparation of the ink for the masking layer, only the metal magnetic powder was used as a masking powder of titanium oxide (manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., product number: R-580, particle size = 0.28 μ).
m, BET specific surface area value = 7 square m / g).

First, a single film of the magnetic layer was produced by screen printing using only the ink for the magnetic layer. Screening was performed with a mesh screen of 400 mesh manufactured by Mesh Kogyo Co., Ltd., and the print medium was a CD (surface not irradiated with laser beam) surface. A good coating film was obtained. It is most efficient in terms of electromagnetic conversion characteristics to subject this coating film to an ultraviolet curing treatment and place the head directly on it to perform magnetic recording / reproduction.

Here, the extent of vertical streaks on the coating surface due to squeegee was visually evaluated. The results for the coating films of sample numbers 15 to 18 are shown in FIG. 230.

As shown in FIG. 230, it was found that when the amount of cyclohexanone added as the organic solvent was large, the ink had a low viscosity and the leveling property was improved. next,
N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) as organic solvent
FIG. 231 shows the results when Sample No. was used (Sample No. 19-22).
Described in.

As shown in FIG. 231, NMP has a high boiling point (boiling point = 202 ° C.) as an organic solvent, and the drying is slow, so that the surface property of the coating film (visual observation) is more excellent. understood.

Next, after printing the magnetic layer ink (Sample No. 18) and the concealing layer ink (Sample Nos. 19-22) thereon, ultraviolet curing treatment was carried out to prepare an information recording medium.

This information recording medium (Sample No. 23-26)
The output of was measured with a measuring device manufactured in-house.

As the measurement conditions, the relative speed between the CD information recording medium and the head was 1.3 m / s, and the linear recording density was 6
The track width of Read / Write was set to 200 μm. The result of relative comparison of the output decibel display values is shown in FIG. 232.

As shown in the results of FIG. 232, the organic solvent:
The mixture of cyclohexanone reduces the thickness of the hiding layer,
As a result, the output is considered to have improved.

Cyclohexanone (boiling point = 156 ° C.) is the most preferable as the organic solvent since it is a general-purpose high-boiling point solvent, is compatible with the epoxy-acrylic ultraviolet curing resin, and is inexpensive.

(Example 31) Next, in order to prepare a coating film to which high hardness powder was added, the metal magnetic powder in the composition table of Example 30 was changed to titanium oxide (product number: R-580), A running durability test was conducted on a sample coating film (Sample No. 27-30) prepared by adding the same except that cyclohexanone was not added.

Here, as the high hardness powder, from the viewpoint of hardness and particle size, the product number of alumina of Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd .: AKP
Since -20 has the best track record, it was adopted and tested.

The test conditions were as follows: a floppy disk head was placed on the concealment layer of the information recording medium, the relative speed between the head and the medium was 1.3 m / s, and the head load was 25 g.
And The number of rotations of the medium was 360 rpm, and the medium was run up to 1,000,000 passes under a normal temperature and normal humidity environment.

The judgment of the result was made in a 5-step display by visual judgment. The criteria for judgment were as follows. There are no traces on the hiding layer ... 5, Small traces on the hiding layer ... 4, Clear traces on the hiding layer ...
3, large traces remain on the concealing layer ... 2, traces extend to the magnetic layer ... 1. The results were judged according to this criterion and are shown in FIG. 233.

As shown in the results of FIG. 233, it is clear that the running durability is improved in the example in which alumina is mixed in the concealing layer in addition to titanium oxide.

(Example 32) Furthermore, the structure of the coating film of the magnetic layer and the concealing layer formed by coating on the magnetic layer is shown in FIG.
A running durability test was performed on the information recording medium having the structure as shown in FIG. The results are shown in FIG. 234. The ink used sample number 30.

As shown in the results of FIG. 234, it was confirmed that the running durability was obviously improved by adopting the structure of the example. The reason for this is considered that the concealing layer wraps the magnetic layer and holds the magnetic layer firmly to prevent the magnetic layer from moving.

(Example 33) Further, an experiment was conducted on the easy adhesion treatment of the CD surface with ultraviolet rays.

[0424] An easy-adhesion treatment device using ultraviolet rays (DRY P
ROCESSOR, manufactured by Oak Manufacturing Co., Ltd., product number: UV
The magnetic layer ink of sample No. 30 was printed on the CD treated with CB) for 3 minutes with the same screen as above. The test was carried out in the usual way. The result is shown in FIG. 235. Figure 2
As shown in the result of No. 35, the easy adhesion treatment by ultraviolet rays is effective.

As is clear from the above description, in the magnetic layer ink and the hiding layer ink, the binder resin having a sulfonic acid group is used in combination with the dispersant, and the pretreatment of the dispersant by the wet method, cyclohexanone or NMP is performed. The addition of organic solvents such as, for example, the addition of high hardness powder such as alumina, and the structural adhesion of the outer circumferential portion of the concealing layer to the CD, the easy adhesion treatment of the CD with ultraviolet rays, etc. The electromagnetic conversion characteristics and running durability will be improved.

Before the ultraviolet curing treatment, the concealing layer is permeated with an organic dye or the like through a character pattern mask,
Level printing can be performed by screen printing or offset printing. Furthermore, the configuration as shown in FIG.
It can be easily achieved by simply changing the size of the computer. That is, it suffices to print using screens having different sizes for the magnetic layer and the hiding layer.

(Embodiment 34) A method of realizing a recording medium to which an identifier showing the presence or absence of a magnetic layer on the medium, that is, the HB identifier of the present invention, is specifically described, will be described here. In the case of a CD, the data of the optical recording layer has 98 frames of the EFM-modulated data structure as shown in FIG. 213, which form one block. In the Q bit of the subcode of the frame in the TOC, for example, if the code that makes "BO" in 8 bits of the POINT area is defined as the HB identification code 468a, the code "BO" is not currently used. CD
The CD-ROM and the HB medium with the magnetic layer according to the present invention can be discriminated while maintaining complete compatibility. Moreover, since the data is recorded in the TOC area, the TOC can be identified at the time of the first reading, so that the HB medium can be identified in a short time.

FIG. 236 (a) shows a cross-sectional view of the medium 2. An aluminum vapor deposition film 4b and pits 4c are provided on a transparent substrate 5, and a magnetic layer 3 is provided thereon. Then, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), the EFM is formed in this pit.
The modulated signal is formed at the factory, and the Qbit 470d of the subcode 470c in the data string 470b is generated.
Control bit 470e of "0011" H
The B identification code 468a is recorded. As another method, an identification code 468a of 8-bit code "BO" is recorded in the POINT 470f in the TOC Qbit. With this method, it is possible to obtain the effect that the recording medium 2 capable of identifying the presence or absence of the magnetic layer without changing the configuration can be obtained.

In FIG. 105, in the CD manufacturing process, a metal film is vapor-deposited on the pit side of the substrate, a protective film is attached, and a magnetic material film is directly formed by a printing machine instead of the conventional printing process. Although an offset printing machine is used as an example, a screen printing machine may be used. In that case, the magnetic film can be printed by a screen printing machine as shown in FIG. After that, since the surface hardness becomes so hard that the protective film becomes unnecessary by the UV curing process by UV exposure shown in FIG. 222, the protective film can be omitted depending on the application. At present, the ratio of screen printing machines is higher than that of offset printing machines in the press factory of CD, so in this method, the existing equipment of many factories can be used, so there is no need to make new capital investment. Effect is produced.

[0430]

As described above, according to the present invention, the magnetic recording layer of the information recording medium has a magnetic layer, a hiding layer, a printing layer, a print protection layer, and an alloy thin film layer in the hiding layer. By holding the fluctuation of the distance on the surface of the recording layer with the thickness of the print protection layer and providing the surface of the print protection layer with irregularities, it has a magnetic recording layer on the back side of the optical recording surface and a label etc. on the entire surface of the magnetic recording layer. It is possible to realize an information recording medium which can be printed and has stable output characteristics.

Further, by providing the magnetic recording layer 3 on the back side of the recording medium 2 having an optical recording surface, the recording / reproducing apparatus of the magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording in the RAM type recording / reproducing apparatus like the magneto-optical recording. By sharing the magnetic field head between the magnetic field modulations, the magnetic recording of information of independent channels provided on the recording medium can be performed with almost no increase in the number of parts and cost. In this case, since the slider tracking mechanism for the magnetic head is originally provided, there is almost no increase in cost on the recording / reproducing device side. Therefore, there is an effect that a magnetic recording / reproducing function independent of optical recording can be added at substantially the same price.

[0432] Also, the recorded recording medium is used as a music CD.
When applied to a hard disk, a HD, a game CDROM or an MDROM, and provided with a magnetic recording track on the back surface by a ROM type recording / reproducing apparatus 1 shown in the block diagram of FIG. It is possible to obtain a remarkable effect such as returning to. Even when recording is limited to only one track in the TOC area as described in the first embodiment, when the gap width is 200 μm, several hundred bits are used.
You can record. This capacity meets the requirements required for the use of the current game IC-ROM with a flash memory. TO
In the case of limiting to C, the access means of the magnetic track is not required, and the system becomes simple.

Further, in a read-only recording / reproducing apparatus for optical recording, it is necessary to provide a magnetic head portion or the like on the opposite side of the recording medium facing the optical head. Since it can be shared with the magnetic field modulation head, the price can be reduced due to the effect of mass production. Originally, the cost is much lower than the magnetic recording component for low density, which is much lower than that of the optical recording component. No tracking mechanism is added because the optical head and the magnetic head on the opposite side are mechanically linked. Therefore, the cost does not increase.

The tracking accuracy is not high by tracking the optical head by the address information or the time information engraved on the optical recording layer on the surface of the RAM type or ROM type recording medium. The magnetic head can be tracking-controlled at an arbitrary position. As a result, for consumer applications such as linear sensors and linear actuators found in floppy disks, it is possible to obtain the effect that no expensive parts need to be added.

The protective layer on the back surface of the conventional magnetic field modulation type magneto-optical recording medium is manufactured by spin coating from a binder and a lubricant. In the case of the present invention, a magnetic material is added to this material and spin coating is performed in this same step, and the number of manufacturing steps does not often increase. This increase in cost is of a negligible order from the overall cost perspective. Therefore, the new value of the magnetic recording function is added with almost no increase in cost.

As described above, according to the present invention, the magnetic channel can be added with almost no increase in cost.
A RAM function can be added to an M-type optical disk or a ROM-only player.

The present invention specifically realizes a consumer-use partial RAM disk for a ROM disk without a cartridge such as a CDROM and a ROM disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM.

In the case of a ROM disk without a cartridge, the conventional system in which a magnetic recording layer is simply provided on the back surface cannot be used for consumer use as described above. For consumer use,
This is because the usage environment is diverse. Magnets at home,
Under the worst conditions, if the magnetic recording layer is exposed as in a floppy disk, the recorded information is easily destroyed under the influence of dirt and scratches. In the present invention, the Hc of the medium is increased to 1200 Oe or more, and the magnetic field of the magnet is taken as a measure to ensure reliability. Further, a hard protective layer having a Mohs hardness of 5 or more is provided on the magnetic recording layer to prevent scratches on the nails and the like. Contamination measures are taken by using a water-repellent material for the media as a protective layer or by providing a cleaning mechanism in the system.

When such a medium is used, it is necessary to adapt the system configuration and function to this special medium. Generally, a magnetic disk such as a floppy disk or a hard disk causes a space loss on the order of several hundred angstroms. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the protective film or the printing layer is located above the magnetic recording layer, the space loss becomes an order of magnitude of 1 μm or more as compared with the magnetic recording of a normal magnetic disk. In order to record this, the present invention first adopts a configuration in which the head gap of the magnetic head is expanded to 5 μm or more. As a result, there is an effect that the above-mentioned medium of the present invention having strong environment resistance can be reproduced. Also, in order to reduce the cost, C on the optical track
In the case of D, the address information called the subcode recorded in 75 times per second is used to access the optical head to a specific optical track, and the specific magnetic track is tracked by the magnetic head that moves in conjunction with the optical head. Is going. In this case, the magnetic head and the optical head can be moved by also using one actuator. This has the effect of significantly reducing the cost.

Since the magnetic noise jumping from the actuator portion of the optical head to the magnetic head is 40 dB or more, the level of the mixed noise is lowered by shielding the optical head or separating the positions of the magnetic head and the optical head. . Further, since a liquid lubrication layer cannot be provided on the medium, the magnetic head is heavily worn. Therefore, the information of the magnetic recording layer is temporarily stored in the internal memory, the content of the internal memory is rewritten during information processing to reduce the number of times of recording / reproducing of the magnetic head, and the magnetic head and the magnetic head are not operated during the period other than recording / reproducing of magnetic information. The number of passes of the magnetic head is substantially reduced by separating from the disk surface. Therefore, there is an effect that the life of the medium and the head is significantly extended.
Also, in order to speed up the start-up when inserting the disc,
"Variable track pitch mode" is provided. This forms a magnetic track just behind the optical track in the order of the optical track accessed by the optical head at the time of rising. Then, when rising, these magnetic tracks are sequentially accessed by the optical tracks and the magnetic heads are automatically accessed. If the magnetic recording data required at the time of rising is recorded in these magnetic tracks, the information on the magnetic track required at the time of rising can be reproduced without accessing the magnetic tracks excessively. This has the effect of eliminating loss time and accelerating the start-up. In addition, when there is magnetic track information for each song, there is an effect that personal data for each song can be accessed faster, for example, when karaoke.
Further, unlike the ordinary floppy, it is not necessary to provide the head portion of the data of each track on a specific angle, and the synchronization area can be arranged at random, so that the rotation angle detection becomes unnecessary and the cost of the device is reduced.

In a disk with a cartridge such as an MDROM, a magnetic material having a low Hc, which is usually used for floppies, can be used for the magnetic recording layer, and the protective layer does not increase the space loss. But,
Since it is not originally considered to attach a liner to the cartridge, if a liner is provided, the torque of the drive motor used so far is weak and does not rotate normally due to friction torque generation. Therefore, in the present invention, the liner is temporarily brought into contact with the medium surface only during magnetic recording. This partial liner method has an effect of preventing the influence of dust. Further, the configuration in which the magneto-optical magnetic field modulation head is also used as the magnetic head has an effect of reducing the number of parts.

As described above, according to the present invention, while satisfying the standards for CD and the like, while ensuring the reliability of the medium having the magnetic recording portion on the back side of the optical recording surface and the recording / reproducing apparatus in the usage environment for consumer use, It can be realized at a cost for consumer use.

[Brief description of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of an optical recording head unit according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a head portion according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a head portion in a tracking direction according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 6 is a timing chart of magnetic recording in the first embodiment.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 10 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 11 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 12 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 13 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 14 is a sectional view of a recording unit in the first embodiment.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the cassette according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the game machine according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to a second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 22 is an enlarged view of a magnetic head unit according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of a recording unit according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 25 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording portion in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the same Example 4.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the recording unit in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 30 (a) is a sectional view when the magneto-optical disk of the fourth embodiment is mounted, and (b) is a sectional view of the fourth embodiment when a CD is mounted.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording unit of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 5 of the present invention.

FIG. 33 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 34 is an enlarged view of the magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of a magnetic recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a magneto-optical recording unit in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 6 of the present invention.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording unit in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 40 is an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulator in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 41 is a top view of the magnetic recording portion according to the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 42 is a top view of the magnetic recording portion according to the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 43 is an enlarged view of the magnetic recording unit in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 44 is an enlarged view of the magnetic field modulator in the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 45 (a) is a top view of a disc cassette according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a top view of a disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

46A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 46B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

47A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

48A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 48B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 49 (a) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the same example 7, and (c) is a top view of a liner peripheral part in the same example 7.

50 (a) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment (b) is a top view of a liner peripheral portion in the seventh embodiment (c) is a cross-sectional view of a liner portion in the seventh embodiment d) is a cross-sectional view of the disk cassette according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 51 is A when the liner pin is inserted off in Example 7 of the present invention.
-A 'cross-sectional view

52 is an A- when the liner pin is inserted on in Example 7; FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

53 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of f is (b), which is A- at the time of inserting the liner pin of the seventh embodiment.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 54 (a) is a magnetic head mount o of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of ff is shown in FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 55 (a) is a magnetic head mount o of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of ff is shown in FIG.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 56 is a top view of the recording medium of Example 7.

FIG. 57 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the seventh embodiment.
A transverse cross-sectional view of the AA ′ surface at the time of f is (b), which is A- at the time of inserting the liner pin of the seventh embodiment.
Cross section of plane A '

FIG. 58 is a sectional view of the front portion of the liner pin of the seventh embodiment when it is off.

FIG. 59 is a sectional view of the front part of the liner pin of the seventh embodiment when it is on.

FIG. 60 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the liner pin of Example 7 when it is off.

FIG. 61 is a transverse sectional view of the liner pin of the seventh embodiment when it is on.

FIG. 62 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off.

FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is on.

FIG. 64 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is on.

FIG. 66 is a sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment with the liner pin off.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the front portion of the seventh embodiment when the liner pin is off and not operating.

68A is a top view of the disc cassette according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68B is a top view of the disc cassette according to the eighth embodiment.

69 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment of FIG.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 70 (a) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment. (B) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment. (C) is a top view of the disc cassette of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 71 is a transverse sectional view of the disc cassette and the liner pin according to the eighth embodiment.

72 (a) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the liner pin peripheral portion of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the liner pin peripheral portion when the conventional cassette of the eighth embodiment is mounted.

73 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment of FIG.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 74 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the eighth embodiment.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the eighth embodiment

FIG. 75 is a top view of the disc cassette according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 76 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted off.

77 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the peripheral portion of the ninth embodiment when the liner pin is inserted on. FIG.

FIG. 78 (a) is a liner pin insertion of of the ninth embodiment.
Transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at time f (b) is a transverse sectional view of peripheral portion at the time of inserting the liner pin of the ninth embodiment

FIG. 79 (a) is a tracking principle diagram without correction in Embodiment 10 of the present invention (b) is a tracking principle diagram without correction in Embodiment 10

80A is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 80B is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment.

81 (a) is a diagram of the eccentricity of the optical track of the disk of the tenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram of eccentricity of the optical track of the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a tracking error of the tenth embodiment. Signal illustration

82A is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment without correction, and FIG. 82B is a tracking state diagram of the optical head of the tenth embodiment after correction;

FIG. 83 is a diagram of a reference track of the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 84 (a) is a side view of the slider when the tenth embodiment is ON, and (b) is a side view of the slider when the tenth embodiment is OFF.

FIG. 85 (a) is a side view of the slider section of the tenth embodiment when the magnetic recording is off. (B) is a side view of the slider section of the tenth embodiment when the magnetic recording is on.

FIG. 86 is a correspondence diagram of disk positions and addresses according to the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a block diagram during magnetic recording in Example 11 of the present invention.

88A is a lateral cross-sectional view of the magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 88B is a bottom view of the magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 88C is a bottom view of another magnetic head of the eleventh embodiment. Figure

FIG. 89 is a spiral recording format diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 90 is a recording format diagram of the guard band according to the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 91 is a data structure diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

92A is a recording timing chart of the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 92B is a recording timing chart at the time of two-head simultaneous recording of the eleventh embodiment.

93 is a block diagram of the same example 11 at the time of reproduction. FIG.

FIG. 94 is a data layout diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of traverse control of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 96 is a cylindrical recording format diagram of the 11th embodiment.

FIG. 97 is a relationship diagram of the traverse gear rotation speed and radius of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 98 is an optical recording surface format diagram of the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 99 is a recording format diagram in the case where the backward compatibility of the eleventh embodiment is provided.

FIG. 100 is a correspondence diagram of the optical recording surface and the magnetic recording surface of the eleventh embodiment.

101 is an overall perspective view of a recording medium in Example 12. FIG.

102 is an overall perspective view of the recording medium of the embodiment. FIG.

103 is a cross-sectional view in the film forming and printing process of the recording medium of the example. FIG.

104 is a cross-sectional view in the film forming and printing process of the recording medium of the example. FIG.

FIG. 105 is an overall perspective view of a coating process of the example.

FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the recording medium in the coating transfer process of the example.

FIG. 107 is a manufacturing process diagram of the recording medium of the example.

FIG. 108 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the recording medium in the coating and transferring step of the recording medium of the example.

FIG. 109 is an overall perspective view of a step of applying the recording medium of the example.

110 is an overall block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 13. FIG.

111 is a lateral cross-sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of the embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a head gap length and an attenuation amount (d) of the embodiment.
Relationship diagram with B)

FIG. 113 is a top view of the magnetic track of the example.

FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic head peripheral portion of the embodiment.

FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the same embodiment when a recording medium is inserted.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distance between the optical pickup and the magnetic head and the amount of relative noise in Examples 12 and 13.

117 is a cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in Embodiment 13. FIG.

118 is a top view of the head traverse portion in Embodiment 13. FIG.

FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of another head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view of another head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

121 is a diagram showing the magnetic field strength of various domestic products in Example 12. FIG.

122 is a recording format diagram of the recording medium in Example 13. FIG.

123 is a recording format diagram of the normal mode on the recording medium in Example 13. FIG.

FIG. 124 is a recording format diagram of the variable track pitch mode on the recording medium in Example 13.

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram of compressing magnetic recording information using a reference table of optical recording information according to a thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 126 is a cross-sectional view of the head traverse portion in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart of recording / reproducing in Embodiment 13 (No. 1)

FIG. 128 is a flowchart (part 2) of recording / reproducing in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 129 is a configuration diagram of a noise detection head according to a thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 130 is a configuration diagram of a magnetic sensor in Example 13.

131A is a lateral cross-sectional view showing the opened / closed state of the upper lid of the recording / reproducing apparatus of Embodiment 14 of the present invention. FIG. 131B is a top view of the printing surface of the recording medium of Embodiment 14 of the present invention.

[FIG. 132] Time of optical recording / reproducing clock signal, magnetic recording / reproducing signal clock signal, magnetic reproducing signal, and reproducing pulse first data string D1, PWM magnetic recording / reproducing signal, reproducing pulse, and second data string in Example 14 Relationship diagram

133 is a perspective view of an optical recording medium cartridge according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram of the entire recording / reproducing apparatus in the same Example 14.

FIG. 135 is a time relationship diagram of the rotational angular velocity ω of the recording medium of Example 14, the optical recording / reproducing clock signal, the magnetic recording / reproducing clock signal, the magnetic recording signal, and the recording wavelength λ of the magnetic recording signal.

FIG. 136 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 15 of the present invention.

FIG. 137 (a) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted (b) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed (c) A perspective view of the fifteenth embodiment when the cartridge is ejected

138 (a) Perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is inserted (b) Perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is fixed (c) Perspective view of the same fifteenth embodiment when a cartridge is ejected

139 (a) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is inserted (b) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is fixed (c) Transverse sectional view of the same embodiment 15 when a cartridge is ejected

FIG. 140 is a block diagram of a recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 16 of the present invention.

FIG. 141A is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted. FIG. 141B is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed.

142A is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is inserted, FIG. 142B is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is fixed, and FIG. 142C is a perspective view of the sixteenth embodiment when the cartridge is ejected.

[FIG. 143] FIG. 143 (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the 16th embodiment when the cartridge is inserted. (B) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the 16th embodiment when the cartridge is fixed.

FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory diagram of the same example 14; (b) is an explanatory diagram of the same example 14

145 (a) Top view of recording medium of Example 14 (b) Explanatory diagram of Example 14 (c) Explanatory diagram of recording medium on which OCR characters of Example 14 are recorded

146 (a) Sectional view of recording medium of Example 14 (b) Sectional view of recording medium of Example 14

FIG. 147 is a block diagram of key unlocking according to the seventeenth embodiment.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the key unlocking program of the seventeenth embodiment.

FIG. 149 is a block diagram of key unlocking according to the eighteenth embodiment.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart of unlocking the key according to the eighteenth embodiment.

151] FIG. 151 is a block diagram of a personal computer and a CD ROM drive of Embodiment 19.

152 is a diagram of an optical address table and a magnetic address table of the recording medium of Example 19; FIG.

[FIG. 153] FIG. 153 is a block diagram of a one-drive type CDROM drive in the personal computer of Embodiment 19.

154 (a) Address table of optical file and magnetic file of Example 19 (b) Address link table of two files of Example 19

FIG. 155 is a cross-sectional view of the optical recording medium of Example 19

FIG. 156 is a flowchart of initial startup of the optical disc in Example 19;

157 (a) Program flow chart for bug correction of CDROM software of Example 20 (b) Address data table of magnetic file and optical file of Example 20 (c) Block diagram of bug correction unit of Example 20

FIG. 158 is a flowchart of a program for (a) bug correction of the CDROM software of the twenty-first embodiment. (B) data correction table of the twenty-first embodiment. (C) block diagram of bug correction unit of the twenty-first embodiment.

FIG. 159 is an overall block diagram of a computer and a disk drive of Embodiment 22.

160 is a file structure of the computer of Example 22; FIG.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart of a virtual file playing operation of the computer according to the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a virtual file rewriting operation of the computer system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart of a virtual file new creation operation of the computer system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

164 (a) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 (b) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 (c) Main computer screen display diagram of the computer of Example 22 d) Screen display diagram of the main computer of the computer of Example 22

FIG. 165 is a display screen diagram of a computer in the case of the two-drive system according to the twenty-second embodiment.

166 (a) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (b) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (c) Main computer screen display diagram of Example 22 (d) Example 22 Main computer screen display

FIG. 167 (a) Screen display diagram on the sub-computer side with the physical file of the twenty-second embodiment (b) Screen display diagram showing the existence of the physical file on the sub-computer side with the physical file of the twenty-second embodiment

168] FIG. 168 is a data relation diagram when a main computer and a sub computer in Example 22 are connected to a network.

FIG. 169 is a screen display diagram of the main computer of Example 22

170 is a screen display diagram of the computer according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG.

FIG. 171 is an information recording layout diagram of the recording medium in the twenty-second embodiment.

172 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 173 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A transverse sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 174 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 175 (a) A perspective view of a magnetic head according to a thirteenth embodiment (b) A transverse sectional view of a magnetic head according to the thirteenth embodiment

[FIG. 176] (a) A perspective view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) A lateral cross-sectional view of the noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 177 (a) A perspective view of a noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment (b) A block diagram of a noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 178 (a) A perspective view of a noise detection coil in the thirteenth embodiment (b) A block diagram of a noise detection method in the thirteenth embodiment

FIG. 179 is a frequency distribution diagram of a reproduction signal before noise cancellation and a reproduction signal after noise cancellation in the thirteenth embodiment.

180 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 22. FIG.

FIG. 181 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to a twenty-third embodiment.

182 (a) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

[FIG. 183] (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment ( d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

184 (a) is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23. (b) is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a data structure of a recording medium in Example 23.

185 (a) Top view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (d) Recording in Example 23 (E) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23

186 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

187 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

188 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (f) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

189 (a) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23 (d) In Example 23 Diagram showing track pitch calculation formula

FIG. 190 (a) A block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in a twenty-third embodiment.

191 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

FIG. 192 (a) A horizontal cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (b) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment (c) A cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in the twenty-third embodiment d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

193 (a) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

194 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (b) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23 (e) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23

FIG. 195 is a relationship diagram between the distance from the magnetic head and the strength of the DC magnetic field in Example 23.

FIG. 196 is a horizontal sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 196 is a horizontal sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 197 is a top view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23.

198 (a) Transverse sectional view of magnetic head in Example 23 (b) Top view of magnetic head in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of magnetic head in Example 23 (d) Magnetic field in Example 23 Top view of head

199 (a) Top view of recording medium in Example 23 (b) Enlarged top view of recording medium in Example 23 (c) Transverse sectional view of recording medium in Example 23

FIG. 200 is a block diagram of a magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23.

201A is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 201B is a cross-sectional view of the magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus according to the twenty-third embodiment. d) Transverse sectional view of magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus in Example 23.

202 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 1. FIG.

FIG. 203 (a) Period T, 1.5 in the first embodiment
T, 2T occurrence frequency distribution chart (b) Occurrence frequency distribution chart of periods T, 1.5T, 2T in the first embodiment

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the relationship between the maximum length of burst correction and the number of corrected symbols in the CD standard.

205 is a diagram showing a fractional distance of data on a medium in Example 1. FIG.

206 is a diagram showing the relationship between the data amount of error correction code and the error rate in Embodiment 1. FIG.

207] FIG. 207 is an array conversion diagram of interleaving according to the first embodiment. [FIG. 207] FIG.

208 is a block diagram of a deinterleave unit in Embodiment 1. FIG.

209 (a) Reed-Solomon E in Example 1 FIG.
Block diagram of CC encoder (b) Block diagram of Reed-Solomon ECC decoder in the first embodiment

FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the error correction program according to the first embodiment.

211 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 1. FIG.

212A is an array conversion diagram of interleaving according to the first embodiment. FIG. 212B is a diagram illustrating a distribution distance of data by interleaving according to the first embodiment.

213] FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a time interval and a distance of a code of a CD subcode in Embodiment 1. [FIG.

FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a magnetic track-optical address correspondence table in the fourteenth embodiment.

215] FIG. 215 is a block diagram of a subcode synchronization signal detection unit and a magnetic recording unit in Embodiment 14. [FIG.

[FIG. 216] A block diagram of magnetic recording in the recording / reproducing apparatus in Embodiment 14.

FIG. 217 is a block diagram of the recording / reproducing apparatus according to the fourteenth embodiment during magnetic reproduction.

218 (a) Time chart of optical reproduction synchronization signal in Example 14 (b) Time chart of ON / OFF of magnetic recording operation in Example 14 (c) Time chart of magnetic recording synchronization signal in Example 14 (d) ) Optical reproduction operation ON / OFF time chart in Example 14 (e) Optical reproduction synchronization signal time chart in Example 14 (f) Magnetic reproduction operation ON / OFF time chart in Example 14 (g) Example 14 (H) Time chart of magnetic reproduction data in Example 14

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an eccentricity amount of a disc in the CD standard.

FIG. 220 is a file structure diagram in the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 221 is an oblique view of the information recording medium in Example 24 of the present invention.

FIG. 222 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a process of forming a magnetic layer in Example 24 of the present invention (b) is a schematic diagram showing a process of forming an aluminum alloy thin film layer in Example 24 of the present invention (c) The schematic diagram showing the forming process of the concealing coating layer in Example 24 of the present invention (d) is the sectional view of the information recording medium after title printing in Example 24 of the present invention (e) is the example 24 of the present invention Sectional view of the information recording medium after applying the print protection layer

223 (a) is a schematic view showing the forming step of the magnetic layer in Example 25 of the invention, and FIG. 223 (b) is a sectional view of the information recording medium after application of the print protective layer in Example 25 of the invention. Is a schematic diagram of the surface polishing step of the print protective layer in Example 25 of the present invention. (D) is a cross-sectional view after the surface polishing of the print protective layer in Example 25 of the present invention.

FIG. 224 is a conceptual diagram of a magnetic recording medium in Example 26 of the present invention.

FIG. 225 is a sectional view of a magnetic recording medium in Example 26 of the present invention.

FIG. 226 is a sectional view of an information recording medium showing an example of the present invention.

FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view of a conventional information recording medium.

FIG. 228 is a relationship diagram between sample numbers and relative outputs in Example 27.

229] FIG. 229 is a relationship diagram between the sample number and the degree of Aizawa in Example 29. [FIG.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sample number and the vertical stripe in Example 29.

231] FIG. 231 is a relationship diagram between sample numbers and vertical stripes in Example 30. [FIG.

FIG. 232 is a relationship diagram between sample numbers and relative outputs in Example 30.

FIG. 233 is a relationship diagram between the addition amount of alumina and titanium oxide and running durability in Example 31.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing running durability in the structure of FIG. 226 in Example 31.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing strength of a coating film after easy adhesion treatment with ultraviolet rays in Example 31.

236 (a) A cross-sectional view of a recording medium in which HB identifier information indicating the presence or absence of a magnetic recording layer in Example 34 is recorded in an optical recording section. (B) It is recorded in the recording medium in Example 34. The figure which shows a concrete HB identification code

[Explanation of symbols]

 1 recording / reproducing apparatus 2 recording medium 3 magnetic recording layer 4 optical recording layer 5 light transmitting layer 6 optical head 7 optical recording block 8 magnetic head 8a main magnetic pole 8b auxiliary magnetic pole 8c head cap 8e uniform magnetic field area 8m magnetic field modulation magnetic head 8s for canceling Magnetic head 9 Magnetic recording block 17 Motor 18 Optical head 19 Head stand 23 Head movement actuator 23a Traverse actuator 24a Traverse movement circuit 34 Memory 34a Memory (for system) 37 Optical recording circuit 37a Magnetic field modulation circuit 38a Clock reproduction circuit 40 Coil 40a Magnetic field modulation Coil 40b Magnetic recording coil 40c Tap 40d Tap 40e Tap 41 Slider 42 Disk cassette 43 Printing base layer 44 Printing area 45 Printing 46 Pit 47 Substrate 48 Light reflection Reflective layer 49 Printing ink 50 Protective layer 51 Arrow 52 Optical recording signal 54 Lens 57 Light emitting part 60 Adhesive layer 61 Magnetic recording signal 65 Optical track 66 Focus 67 Magnetic track 67a Recording magnetic track 67b Reproducing magnetic track 67s Servo magnetic track 67f Guard band 67g Guard band 67x Cleaning track 69 High μ magnetic layer 70 Head gap 70a Recording head gap 70b Reproducing head gap 81 Interference layer 84 Reflective film 85 Modulation magnetic field 85a Magnetic flux 85b Magnetic flux 150 Coupling portion 201 Discrimination step 202 Reproduction step 203 Reproduction transcription step 204 Reproduction-only step 205 Recording transfer step 206 Recording step 207 Transfer step 210 Degaussing area 210a Degaussing area 210b Degaussing area 301 Shutter 302 Head Hole 303 Liner hole 304 Liner 305 Liner support 305a Movable part 305b Sub-liner support 305c Liner lifting part 307 Groove 307a Liner drive groove 310 Liner pin 311 Liner pin guide 312 Pin drive lever 313 Recognition hole 314 Protective pin 315 Liner drive part 316 Pin axis 317 Spring 318 Connection part 319 Pin shutter 320 Optical address 321a Center 321b Center 321c Center 322 Optical data row 323 Address 324 Data 325 Guard band 326 Track group 327 Block 328 Track data 328 Synchronous signal 329 Address 330 Pacty 331 Circuit 333 Separation 334 Modulation circuit 335 Disk circuit angle detection unit 336 Eccentricity correction amount memory 337 None Signal part 338 Traverse control part 339 Optical address magnetic address correspondence table 340 Head amplifier 341 Demodulator 342 Error check part 343 Data separation part 344 AND circuit 345 Recorded data 346 Non-light address area 347 Optical address area 348 Magnetic TOC area 349 Track locus 350 Head reproducing section 351 Memory data 352 Coating material pot 353 Coating material transfer roll 354 Intaglio drum 355 Etching section 356 Scriber 357 Soft transfer roll 358 Coating section 360 Magnetic shield 361 Resin section 362 Random magnetic field generator 363 Traverse ACT 363b Magnetic head traverse shaku 364 Position reference part 365 Disc lock part 366 Traverse connecting part 367 Traverse gear 367c Magnetic head Laverse gear 368 Reference table 369 Synchronization part 370 Recording format 371 Track number part 372 Data part 373 CRC part 374 Gap part 375 Connection part guide part 376 Disk cleaning part 377 Magnetic head cleaning part 378 Noise canceller 380 Disk cleaning part Connection part 381 Magnetic sensor 382 Optical reproduction clock signal 383 Magnetic clock signal 384 Magnetic recording signal 385 Discrimination window time 386 Optical sensor 387 Optical mark 387a Bar code 388 Light transmitting portion 389 Upper lid 390 Cassette pig 391 Magnetic surface shutter 392 Shutter connecting portion 393 Cassette pig rotating shaft 394 Cassette insertion slot 395 Tape 396 Label section 397 Buzzer 398 Magnetic recording area 399 Screen mark Machine 400 Bar code printer 401 High Hc section 402 Magnetic section 402a Spatial section 403 Magnetic section 404 Key management table 405 (step point) 406 Key release decoder 407 Voice expansion block 408 Personal computer 409 Hard disk 410 Installation step 411 Application 412 OS 413 BIOS 414 Drive 415 Interface 416 421 Optical File 422 Magnetic File 436 Network BIOS 437 LAN Network 447 447a Flowchart Step 448 Corrected Data 449 Display 450 Keypad 451 Error Correction Step 452 Parity 453 C1 Parity 454 C2 Parity 455 Index 456 Subcode Sync Detection Section 457 Inde Cousse detection unit 458 Frequency divider 459 Magnetic synchronization signal detection unit 460 Shortest / longest pulse detection unit 461 Pseudo optical synchronization signal generation unit 462 Pseudo magnetic synchronization signal generation unit 463 Optical synchronization signal detector 464 Frequency division / multiplier 465 Changeover switch 466 Waveform shaping section 467 Clock recovery section 468 HB identifier information indicating presence / absence of magnetic layer 468a HB identification code 469 Optical address information 469a Optical address code 1101 Printing protection layer 1102 Printing layer 1103 Hiding layer 1104 Aluminum alloy thin film layer 1105 Magnetic layer 1106 Protection Layer 1107 Light reflection film 1108 Substrate 1109 Printing 1110 Printing area 1111 Information recording medium 1112 Magnetic recording layer 1113 Concealment coating layer 1114 Optical recording surface 1115 Plastic film 1116 Adhesive layer 1118 Paint tank 1119 Addition Pump 1120 Nozzle 1121 Vacuum chamber 1122 Crucible 1123 Heater 1124 Power supply 1125 Polishing tape 1126 Screen plate 1127 Squeegee 1128 Magnetic paint 1131 Non-magnetic substrate 1132 Adhesive layer 1133 Magnetic layer 1134 Printing layer 1135 Magnetic recording portion 1136 Printing portion 2001 CD 200 Magnetic masking Layer 2004 Outer peripheral portion of the concealing layer

─────────────────────────────────────────────────── ─── Continuation of front page (51) Int.Cl. ⁶ Identification number Internal reference number FI technical indication location G11B 23/30 Z (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-205682 (32) Priority Date 5 (1993) July 27 (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-297504 (32) Priority Day 5 (1993) November 2 (33) Priority Claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-314114 (32) Priority date Hei 5 (1993) November 19 (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim Number Japanese Patent Application No. 5-333855 (32) Priority Date 5 (1993) December 27 (33) Country of priority claim Japan (JP)

Claims (21)

[Claims] 1. An information recording medium having a magnetic recording layer on the back side of an optical recording surface, the magnetic recording layer comprising a magnetic layer, a masking layer, a printing layer and a print protection layer, wherein a metal thin film layer is provided as the masking layer. An information recording medium including: 2. An information recording medium having a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of an optical recording surface, the magnetic recording layer comprising a magnetic layer, a masking layer, a printing layer, and a printing protection layer, wherein Rmax is on the printing protection layer surface. An information recording medium having irregularities of 0.5 μm or more. 3. An information recording medium having a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of an optical recording surface, the magnetic recording layer comprising a magnetic layer, a masking layer, a printing layer, and a print protection layer, wherein the thickness distribution of the printing layer is An information recording medium characterized in that the thickness of the print protection layer is changed in accordance with the change in the distance between the magnetic layer surface and the magnetic recording layer surface to be 20% or less. 4. A method for producing an information recording medium, comprising a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of an optical recording surface, the magnetic recording layer comprising a magnetic layer, a masking layer, a printing layer, and a printing protection layer. A method for manufacturing an information recording medium, characterized in that after curing, an unevenness is formed on the magnetic recording surface with a polishing tape. 5. A method for producing an information recording medium, comprising a magnetic recording layer on the back surface of an optical recording surface, the magnetic recording layer comprising a magnetic layer, a masking layer, a printing layer, and a printing protection layer. A method for producing an information recording medium, characterized by smoothing the surface of a magnetic recording layer by polishing the surface after excessive coating and curing. 6. A magnetic recording medium having an optical recording / reproducing surface opposite to the magnetic recording surface, wherein at least a portion of the magnetic recording surface used for magnetic recording is lower than other portions. . 7. A single coating film or a multilayer coating film of a magnetic layer is formed on a non-magnetic support, two layers of the multilayer coating film are a magnetic layer and a hiding layer, and the hiding layer is on the magnetic layer. An information recording medium, which is formed by being directly overlaid on a substrate. 8. The information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein a binder resin containing a sulfonic acid group and a dispersant containing a sulfonic acid group coexist in the magnetic layer. 9. The information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein a binder resin containing a sulfonic acid group and a dispersant containing a sulfonic acid group coexist in the hiding layer. 10. The information recording medium according to claim 8, wherein the dispersant is p-toluenesulfonic acid. 11. A dispersant is dissolved in an organic solvent, sufficiently adsorbed on the surface of the powder, filtered and dried, and then a binder resin is added to disperse and prepare a coating material. Method for manufacturing information recording medium. 12. The organic solvent is methyl ethyl ketone (ME
The method for manufacturing an information recording medium according to claim 11, wherein the method is K). 13. The information recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the magnetic layer ink comprises an inorganic powder containing a photocurable resin, an organic solvent, and magnetic powder. 14. The information recording medium according to claim 13, wherein only the magnetic layer is formed alone on the non-magnetic support. 15. The information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein the masking layer ink comprises an inorganic powder containing a photocurable resin, an organic solvent, and a masking powder. 16. The information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein the organic solvent is cyclohexanone. 17. The information recording medium according to claim 13, wherein the organic solvent is N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP). 18. The information recording medium according to claim 15, wherein the inorganic powder is a mixture of titanium oxide and alumina. 19. The information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein an outer peripheral portion of the concealing layer protrudes from the concealing layer and is directly bonded to the non-magnetic support. 20. The manufacturing of an information recording medium according to claim 7, wherein the non-magnetic support is a CD (compact disc), and the surface on which the coating film is formed is subjected to an easy adhesion treatment with ultraviolet rays. Method. 21. A disk-shaped recording medium having a transparent substrate and an optical recording layer and a magnetic recording layer formed on one side of the transparent substrate is mounted, and light from a light source is transmitted by an optical head unit and an optical head moving unit. An image is formed on the optical recording layer from the transparent substrate side, and the signal of the optical recording layer is reproduced by an optical recording / reproducing circuit, and a magnetic head portion is provided on the magnetic recording layer side of the recording medium. 3.0 μ in a recording / reproducing device that performs magnetic recording or reproduction by a magnetic recording / reproducing circuit.
A recording / reproducing apparatus using a magnetic head having a head gap of not less than m and not more than 200 μm.